PIONEER PDP5080HD - TV

PDP5080HD - TV PIONEER - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free PDP5080HD PIONEER in PDF.

📄 288 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question
Notice PIONEER PDP5080HD - page 7
View the manual : Français FR English EN Español ES
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.

User questions about PDP5080HD PIONEER

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your TV in PDF format for free! Find your manual PDP5080HD - PIONEER and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. PDP5080HD by PIONEER.

USER MANUAL PDP5080HD PIONEER

Pioneer sound.vision.soul

Operating Instructions | Mode d'emploi | Manual de instrucciones

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Pioneer sound.vision.soul - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Pioneer sound.vision.soul - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Pioneer sound.vision.soul - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Pioneer sound.vision.soul - 4

PLASMA DISPLAY SYSTEM SYSTEME D'ÉCRAN PLASMA SISTEMA DE PANTALLA DE PLASMA

PDP-5080HD

PDP-4280HD

IMPORTANT

PIONEER PDP5080HD - IMPORTANT - 1

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated 'dangerous voltage' within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - CAUTION: - 1

The excclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

D3-4-2-1-1_En-A

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1) Read these instructions.
2) Keep these instructions.
3) Heed all warnings.
4) Follow all instructions.
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
6) Clean only with dry cloth.
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - 1

13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

WARNING: This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A_En

NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER

THIS REMINDER IS PROVIDED TO CALL THE CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER'S ATTENTION TO ARTICLE 820-40 OF THE NEC THAT PROVIDES GUIDELINES FOR PROPER GROUNDING AND, IN PARTICULAR, SPECIFIES THAT THE CABLE GROUND SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE GROUNDING SYSTEM OF THE BUILDING, AS CLOSE TO THE POINT OF CABLE ENTRY AS PRACTICAL. D1-4-2-8. En

WARNING: This product equipped with a three-wire grounding (earthed) plug - a plug that has a third (grounding) pin. This plug only fits a grounding-type power outlet. If you are unable to insert the plug into an outlet, contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a properly grounded one. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding plug D3-4-2-1-6_A_En

WARNING: To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En

This digital television is capable of receiving analog basic, digital basic and digital premium cable television programming by direct connection to a cable system providing such programming. A security card provided by your cable operator is required to view encrypted digital programming. Certain advanced and interactive digital cable services such as video-on-demand, a cable operator's enhanced program guide and data-enhanced television services may require the use of a set-top box. For more information call your local cable operator.

VENTILATION CAUTION:

When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation. For the minimum space required, see page 16.

WARNING: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed.

WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the product will expose you to chemicals listed on proposition 65 known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defect or other reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling

D36-P4 A En

Information to User

Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user's right to operate the equipment.

[For Canadian model]

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Product Name: Plasma Display System

Model Number: PDP-5080HD/PDP-4280HD

Product Category: Class B Personal Computers & Peripherals

Responsible Party Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS SERVICE, INC.

Address: 1925 E. DOMINGUEZ ST., LONG BEACH, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.

Phone: 800-421-1625

URL: http://www.pioneerelectronics.com

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

  • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
    – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
  • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
  • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

D8-10-1-2 En

CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3a_En

IMPORTANT NOTICE - THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS LOCATED IN THE REAR. PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR ENCLOSED WARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SECURE AREA. THIS IS FOR YOUR SECURITY. D1-4-2-6-1_En

CAUTION: The switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation) D3-4-2-2a_A_En

STANDBY:

When placed into the standby mode, the main power flow is cut and the unit is no longer fully operational.

STANDBY/ON Indicator:

The indicator is lit red when the unit is in the standby mode and lit blue when it is in the power-on mode. No operation can be performed when the indicator is off. However, the Plasma Display system will still consume some power as long as the power cord is inserted into the power outlet.

Operating Environment

Operating environment temperature and humidity:

+0°C to +40°C (+32°F to +104°F); less than 85%RH (cooling vents not blocked)

Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light)

D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Operating Environment - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Operating Environment - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Operating Environment - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Operating Environment - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Operating Environment - 5

Contents

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.

Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.

In some countries or regions, the shape of the power plug and power outlet may sometimes differ from that shown in the explanatory drawings. However the method of connecting and operating the unit is the same.

Illustrations shown in this manual are for the PDP-5080HD unless otherwise specified.

Contents

01 Important User Guidance

Information 7

02 Safety Precautions

Installation Precautions ......11

03 Supplied Accessories.... 12

04 Part Names.... 13

Plasma display 13

Remote control unit 15

05 Preparation.... 16

Installing the plasma display .....16

Moving the plasma display 16

Installing the Pioneer speaker (PDP-5080HD) 16

When using the hung on wall unit: .....20

Preventing the plasma display from falling over 21

Attaching/detaching the Pioneer stand 22

Cable connections for watching digital and/or conventional TV channels .....24

Inserting the CableCARD™ 24

Routing cables 25

Connecting the power cord ....25

Preparing the remote control unit ....26 Allowed operation range of the remote control unit ....26

06 Basic Operations.... 27

Turning on the power 27

Turning off the power 27

Watching TV channels .....28

Selecting the antenna ....28

Changing channels 28

Changing the volume and sound .....29

Changing the language 29

Setting MTS/SAP mode 30

Viewing a channel banner ....31

Using the POD service 31

Using the multiscreen functions ..... 31

Splitting the screen 31

Freezing images 32

07 TV Guide On Screen™ System

Setup 33

About the TV Guide On Screen™ system 33

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system 33

08 The HOME MENU....36

HOME MENU overview 36

Using the HOME MENU 36

09 Tuner Setup.... 37

Setting up TV channels .... 37 Using Auto Channel Preset .... 37

Setting for skipping unwanted channels 37

Setting up TV channels manually ..... 37

Checking signal strength 37

Checking the CableCARD™ ID ...... 38

Parental Control 38

Changing the password 38

Clearing the password 39

Activating the Parental Control ...... 39

Setting the voluntary movie rating system (MPAA) 39

Setting the TV ratings 39

Setting the TV Parental Guidelines (TV Guidelines) 40

Blocking Not Rated TV programs ..... 40

Canadian rating systems 40

Setting Canadian English ratings ..... 41

Setting Canadian French ratings ..... 41

Setting new ratings 41

Deleting new ratings 42

Temporarily deactivating the Parental Control 42

Contents

Setting your favorite channels 43

Setting up closed captions 43

Activating the closed caption 43

Selecting the type of conventional closed

captions 43

Selecting digital closed captions ..... 43

Selecting digital closed caption

parameters 44

Clock Setting 44

10 TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation ....45

Using the TV Guide On Screen™

system 45

Screen components 45

The Listings screen 46

Setting program reminders 46

Searching for programs 48

Searching by category 48

Searching by keyword 49

Alphabetical search 49

The search Episode Options menu ..... 50

Scheduling reminders 50

Using the reminder To Do list .... 51

Changing setup options 51

Changing the system settings ..... 51

Changing the channel display settings 52

Changing the default options .... 53

Displaying setup progress 53

11 Adjustments and Settings ....54

AV Selection 54

Basic picture adjustments 55

Advanced picture adjustments .... 55

Using PureCinema 55

Using the Picture Detail 56

Using Color Temp 56

Using CTI 56

Eliminating noise from images ..... 56

Comparing picture adjustments on the screen ....57

Sound adjustments ....57

Power Control 58

Energy Save 58

No Signal off (AV source only) .....58

No Operation off (AV source only) ..... 59

Power Management (PC source only) ....59

Sleep Timer 59

Image position adjustment (AV source only) ....60

Automatic image position and clock adjustments (PC source only) 60

Manual image position and clock adjustments (PC source only) 60

Reducing video noise 61

Selecting a game mode 61

Selecting a screen size manually ..... 61

Selecting a screen size automatically .....62

Detecting side masks 62

Changing the brightness at both sides of the screen (Side Mask) .....62

Room Light Sensor 63

Blue LED Dimmer 63

Orbiter 63

Video Pattern 63

Language setting 63

12 Enjoying through External Equipment 64

About External Equipment 64

Watching a DVD image 64

Watching a VCR image 64

Using HDMI Input 65

Enjoying a game console or watching camcorder images ....67

Connecting other audio equipment .....67

Watching an image from a personal computer 68

Contents

Computer compatibility chart ......68

Connecting control cords 69

Enjoying through USB interface

(Home Gallery function) 70

Connecting a USB device .....70

Removing a USB device 70

Starting the initial Home Gallery

screen 71

Starting a thumbnail screen .....71

Starting a standard single-image

screen 72

Starting the Slide Show Setup

screen 72

Starting the Slide Show screen .....73

13 Using the HDMI Control.... 74

Using the HDMI Control functions .....74

Making the HDMI Control

connections 75

Setting the HDMI Control 76

Using the HDMI Control menus .....77

14 Useful Remote Control Features..... 78

Presetting manufacturer codes to control

other devices 78

Presetting manufacturer codes .....78

Library Search 78

Manufacturing Reset 78

Programming codes 79

Using the remote control unit to

control other devices 84

15 Appendix 88

Troubleshooting 88

Specifications 98

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Contents - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Contents - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Contents - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Contents - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Contents - 5

Important User Guidance Information

Chapter 1

Important User Guidance Information

In order to obtain maximum enjoyment from this Pioneer PDP-5080HD/PDP-4280HD plasma display, please first read this information carefully.

With the Pioneer PDP-5080HD/PDP-4280HD, you can be assured of a high quality plasma display with long-life and high reliability. To achieve images of exceptional quality, this Pioneer plasma display incorporates state of the art design and construction, as well as very precise and highly advanced technology.

The Pioneer PDP-5080HD/PDP-4280HD incorporates the latest in color filter technology – Direct Color Filter. This improves the color/picture reproduction of these models as compared to previous models. It also eliminates the need for a physical glass panel to be placed in front of the plasma panel, which furthers Pioneer's continued goal of reducing environmental waste in consumer electronics, now during the manufacturing process and in the future during the recycling process.

Over the course of its lifetime, the luminosity of the Pioneer PDP-5080HD/PDP-4280HD plasma display will diminish very slowly, such as with all phosphor-based screens (for example, a traditional tube-type television). To enjoy beautiful and bright images on your Pioneer plasma display for many years to come, please carefully read and follow the usage guidelines below.

Usage guidelines

All phosphor-based screens (including conventional tube-type televisions) can be affected by displaying static images for a prolonged period. Plasma displays are no exception to this rule. After-image and permanent effects on the screen can be avoided by taking some basic precautions. By following the recommendations listed below, you can ensure longer and satisfactory results from your plasma:

  • Whenever possible, avoid frequently displaying the same image or virtually still moving pictures (e.g., closed-captioned images or video game images which have static portions).
  • Avoid viewing the On Screen Display for extended periods, from a DVD player, VCR, and all other components.
  • Do not leave the same picture freeze-framed or paused continuously over a long period of time, when using the still picture mode from a TV, VCR, DVD player or any other component.
  • Images which have both very bright areas and very dark areas side by side should not be displayed for a prolonged period of time.
  • When playing a game, the "GAME" mode setting within "AV Selection" is strongly recommended. However, please limit its use to less than two hours at a time.
  • After playing a game, or displaying a PC image or any still image, it is best to view a normal moving picture in the "WIDE" or "FULL" screen setting for over three times longer than the previous still/moving image.
  • After using the plasma display, always switch the display to "STANDBY" mode.
  • Extensive viewing of content with top, bottom, or side masks may cause uneven wear. After viewing masked content, it is recommended to view full screen motion video for an equal or greater amount of time.

Installation guidelines

The Pioneer PDP-5080HD/PDP-4280HD plasma display incorporates a very thin design. To ensure safety, please take the proper measures to mount or install the plasma display, in order to prevent the unit from lipping over in the event of vibration or accidental movement.

This product should be installed by using only parts and accessories designed by Pioneer. Use of accessories other than the Pioneer stand or installation bracket may result in instability, and could cause injury. For custom installation, please consult the dealer where the unit was purchased. To ensure correct installation, experienced and qualified experts must install the unit;

Pioneer will not be held responsible for accident or damage caused by the use of parts and accessories manufactured by other companies, inadequate installation or stabilization, erroneous operation, remodeling or natural disasters.

To avoid malfunction and overheating when installing, make sure that the vents on the main unit are not blocked. To ensure proper heat emission:

  • Distance the unit slightly from other equipment, walls, etc. For the minimum space required around the unit, see page 16.
  • Do not fit the unit inside narrow spaces where ventilation is poor.
  • Do not cover with a cloth, etc.
  • Clean the vents on the sides and rear of the unit to remove dust build-up by using a vacuum cleaner set to its lowest suction setting.
  • Do not place the product on a carpet or blanket.
  • Do not leave the product tilted over.
  • Do not invert the product.

Using the unit without proper ventilation may cause the internal temperature to rise, and could result in possible malfunction. When the surrounding or internal temperature exceeds a certain degree, the display will automatically power off in order to cool the internal electronics and prevent a hazardous occurrence.

Malfunction can be caused by many factors: inappropriate installation site, improper assembly/installation/mounting, improper operation of or modifications made to this product. However, Pioneer cannot be held responsible for accidents or malfunction caused by the above.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Installation guidelines - 1

Note

The following are typical effects and characteristics of a phosphor-based matrix display and as such, are not covered by the manufacturer's limited warranties:

  • Permanent residual images upon the phosphors of the panel.
    • The existence of a minute number of inactive light cells.
  • Panel generated sounds, examples: Fan motor noise, and electrical circuit humming / glass panel buzzing

Important User Guidance Information

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Important User Guidance Information - 1

Caution

Pioneer bears no responsibility for any damage arising from incorrect use of the product by you or other people, malfunctions when in use, other product related problems, and use of the product except in cases where the company must be liable.

Plasma display protection function

When still images (such as photos and computer images) stay on the screen for an extended period of time, the screen will be slightly dimmed. This is because the protection function of the plasma display automatically adjusts the brightness to protect the screen when detecting still images; so this does not designate malfunction. The screen is dimmed when a still image is detected for about three minutes.

Information of pixel defect

Plasma screens display information using pixels. Pioneer plasma display panels contain a very large number of pixels. (Depending on the panel size; over 2.3 million pixels in case of a 42 inch display, over 3.1 million pixels in case of a 50 inch display). All Pioneer display panels are manufactured using a very high level of ultra-precision technology and undergo individual quality control.

In rare cases, some pixels can be permanently switched off, or on, resulting in either a black or colored pixel permanently fixed on the screen.

This effect is common to all plasma displays because it is a consequence of the technology.

If the defective pixels are visible at a normal viewing distance of between 2.5 and 3.5 meters (8.2 and 11.5 feet) while viewing a normal broadcast (i.e. not a test card, still image or single color display) please contact Pioneer Customer Support Div. (USA) or Customer Satisfaction Dept. (CANADA). See back cover.

II, however, they can only be seen close up or during single color displays then this is considered normal for this technology.

Infrared rays

The plasma display releases infrared rays because of its characteristics. Depending on how the plasma display is in use, the remote controls of nearby equipment may be adversely affected or wireless headphones using infrared rays are interfered with by noise. If this is the case, place that equipment at a location where its remote control sensor is not affected.

Radio interference

While this product meets the required specifications, it emits a small amount of noise. If you place such equipment as an AM radio, personal computer, and VCR close to this product, that equipment may be interfered. If this happens, place that equipment far enough from this product.

Plasma display driving sound

The screen of the plasma display is composed of extremely fine pixels and these pixels emit light according to received video signals. This principle may cause you to hear a buzz or electrical hum coming from the plasma display.

Do not attach such items as labels and tape to the product.

• This may result in the discoloration or scratch of the cabinet.

When not using the product for a long period of time

- If you do not use the product for a long period of time, the functions of the product may be adversely affected. Switch on and run the product occasionally.

Condensation

- Condensation may take place on the surface or inside of the product when the product is rapidly moved from a cold place to a warm place or just after a heater is switched on on a winter morning, for example. When condensation takes place, do not switch on the product until condensation disappears. Using the product with condensation may result in malfunction.

Cleaning the surface of the screen and the glossy surface of the front cabinet

- When cleaning the surface of the screen or the glossy surface of the front cabinet, gently wipe it with a dry soft cloth; the supplied cleaning cloth or other similar cloths (e.g., cotton and flannel). If you use a dusly or hard cloth or if you rub the screen hard, the surface of the product will be scratched.

- If you clean the surface of the screen with a wet cloth, water droplets on the surface may enter into the product, resulting in malfunction.

Cleaning the cabinet

  • When cleaning the cabinet of this product, gently wipe it with a clean soft cloth (e.g., cotton and flannel). If you use a dusty or hard cloth or if you rub the cabinet hard, the surface of the cabinet will be scratched.
  • The cabinet of this product is mostly composed of plastic. Do not use chemicals such as benzene or thinner to clean the cabinet. Using these chemicals may result in quality deterioration or coating removal.
  • Do not expose the product to volatile gas or fluid such as pesticide. Do not bring the product in contact with rubber or vinyl products for a long period of time. The effect of plasticizer in the plastic may result in quality deterioration or coating removal.
  • If you clean the surface of the cabinet with a wet cloth, water droplets on the surface may enter into the product, resulting in malfunction.

Handles at the rear of the plasma display

  • Do not remove the handles from the rear of the plasma display.
  • When moving the plasma display, ask another person for help and use the handles attached to the rear of the plasma display. Do not move the plasma display by holding only a single handle. Use the handles as shown on page 16.
  • Do not use the handles to hang the product when installing or carrying the product, for example. Do not use the handles for the purpose of preventing the product from tilting over.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Handles at the rear of the plasma display - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Handles at the rear of the plasma display - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Handles at the rear of the plasma display - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Handles at the rear of the plasma display - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Handles at the rear of the plasma display - 5

Important User Guidance Information

Fan motor noise

The rotation speed of the cooling fan motor increases when the ambient temperature of the plasma display becomes high. You may hear the sound of the fan motor at that time.

To use this product for a long period of time

Energy Save maintains efficiency of the screen for a long period of time by decreasing picture brightness and lowering power consumption. Setting Energy Save to "Mode 1" is recommended for increased efficiency.

About the menu window size following video format switch

The video program that you watch may be high definition (HD) or standard definition (SD). This plasma display is designed to scale to each type of definition properly. If the video program's definition type changes while a menu window is displayed on the screen (for example: HD → SD or SD → HD), the menu size may temporarily shrink or enlarge until the scaling is completed. This may happen, for example, when you switch between television and an external digital video recorder

(D-VHS), or when your recorded program switches between different definition types, while the on-screen menu is being shown.

If this happens, the menu will return to its normal size after two to three seconds. This action is normal, and does not indicate a problem with your plasma display.

Image Retention

When a static image is left frozen on a display for several hours, a faint imprint of the image, known as image retention, can remain. This image retention may be temporary or permanent. Although caused by different things, image retention can occur on all display technologies, including plasma and LCD. On today's plasma displays, permanent image retention is less of a worry. Most image retention can be improved simply by watching moving video.

Image retention, also known as burn-in, can occur in all phosphor-based display systems (including CRT television systems—both direct view and projection—as well as plasma displays). Displaying the same still images for long periods should be avoided as permanent image retention or burn-in may occur. Recommended guidelines are as follows:

Do not display static images for long periods (such as still images, fixed images from PC or TV game equipment, and/or fixed images such as time of day indicator or channel logo display).

Do not display content in the 4:3 aspect ratio (black or gray bars on left and right side of content) or letter-box content (black bars above and below content) for extended periods of time, or use either of these viewing modes repeatedly within a short period of time. This plasma display is equipped with multiple wide-screen viewing modes; use one of these screen modes to fill the entire screen with content.

Displaying dark images after displaying still images for a period of time may cause image retention. In most cases, the image retention can be corrected by displaying bright images for a similar period of time.

If you display still images on your plasma display for long periods of time, image retention may be irreparable.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Image Retention - 1

Caution

Panel sticking and after-image lag

- Displaying the same images such as still images for a long time may cause after-image lagging. This may occur in the following two cases.

1 After-image lagging due to remaining electric load

When image patterns with very high peak luminance are displayed more than one minute, after-image lagging may occur due to the remaining electric load. The after-images remaining on the screen will disappear when moving images are displayed. The time for the after-images to disappear depends on the luminance of the still images and the time they had been displayed.

2 After-image (lag image) due to burning

Avoid displaying the same image on the plasma display continuously over a long period of time. If the same image is displayed continuously for several hours, or for shorter periods of time over several days, a permanent after-image may remain on the screen due to burning of the fluorescent materials. Such images may become less noticeable if moving images are later displayed, but they will not disappear completely.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - After-image (lag image) due to burning - 1

Note

  • When a program menu, TV Guide screen or frozen image is displayed for 5 to 10 minutes, the system automatically turns the image off to prevent damage from screen burning.
  • To minimize image retention, the display position is automatically changed imperceptibly when watching plasma display. Some parts of the picture may not be visible (see Orbiter on page 63).

Minimizing damage from screen burning

  • Set the Side Mask detection function to "On". The High Definition 16:9 aspect ratio images containing side masks will be detected automatically and side masks will be added or the image displayed in full screen.
    • We recommend that you enjoy watching images displayed in full screen, except when doing so may result in copyright infringement. The use of images displayed in screen sizes different from the original video for financial gain or in broadcasting for public viewing may result in infringement of the legally enforceable rights of the copyright holder (see page 62).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Minimizing damage from screen burning - 1

Caution

DO NOT PLACE THIS PRODUCT ON AN UNSTABLE CART, STAND, TRIPOD, BRACKET, OR TABLE. THE PRODUCT MAY FALL, CAUSING SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT. USE ONLY WITH A CART, STAND, TRIPOD, BRACKET, OR TABLE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER, OR SOLD WITH THE PRODUCT. FOLLOW THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN INSTALLING THE PRODUCT AND USE MOUNTING ACCESSORIES RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER.

A PRODUCT AND CART COMBINATION SHOULD BE MOVED WITH THE CARE. QUICK STOPS, EXCESSIVE FORCE, AND UNEVEN SURFACES MAY CAUSE THE PRODUCT AND CART COMBINATION TO OVERTURN.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Caution - 1

Safety Precautions

Chapter 2 Safety Precautions

Electricity is used to perform many useful functions, but it can also cause personal injuries and property damage if improperly handled. This product has been engineered and manufactured with the highest priority on safety. However, improper use can result in electric shock and/or fire. In order to prevent potential danger, please observe the following instructions when installing, operating and cleaning the product. To ensure your safety and prolong the service life of your product, please read the following precautions carefully before using the product.

  1. Read instructions—All operating instructions must be read and understood before the product is operated.
  2. Keep this manual in a safe place—These safety and operating instructions must be kept in a safe place for future reference.
  3. Observe warnings—All warnings on the product and in the instructions must be observed closely.
  4. Follow instructions—All operating instructions must be followed.
  5. Cleaning—Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before cleaning the product. To clean the product, use the supplied cleaning cloth or other soft cloth (e.g., cotton, flannel). Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
  6. Attachments—Do not use attachments not recommended by the manufacturer. Use of inadequate attachments can result in accidents.
  7. Water and moisture—Do not use the product near water, such as bathtub, washbasin, kitchen sink and laundry tub, swimming pool and in a wet basement.
  8. Stand—Do not place the product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod or table. Placing the product on an unstable base can cause the product to fall, resulting in serious personal injuries as well as damage to the product. Use only a cart, stand, tripod, bracket or table recommended by the manufacturer or sold with the product. When mounting the product on a wall, be sure to follow the manufacturer's instructions. Use only the mounting hardware recommended by the manufacturer.
  9. When relocating the product placed on a cart, it must be moved with utmost care. Sudden stops, excessive force and uneven floor surface can cause the product to fall from the cart.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Chapter 2 Safety Precautions - 1

  1. Ventilation—The vents and other openings in the cabinet are designed for ventilation. Do not cover or block these vents and openings since insufficient ventilation can cause overheating and/or shorten the life of the product. Do not place the product on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface, since they can block ventilation openings. This product is not designed for built-in installation; do not place the product in an enclosed place such as a bookcase or rack, unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer's instructions are followed.

  2. Power source—This product must operate on a power source specified on the specification label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply used in your home, consult your dealer or local power company.

  3. Power cord protection—The power cords must be routed properly to prevent people from stepping on them or objects from resting on them. Check the cords at the plugs and product.

  4. The plasma display used in this product is made of glass. Therefore, it can break when the product is dropped or applied with impact. Be careful not to be injured by broken glass pieces in case the plasma display breaks.
  5. Overloading—Do not overload AC outlets or extension cords. Overloading can cause fire or electric shock.
  6. Entering of objects and liquids—Never insert an object into the product through vents or openings. High voltage flows in the product, and inserting an object can cause electric shock and/or short internal parts. For the same reason, do not spill water or liquid on the product.
  7. Servicing—Do not attempt to service the product yourself. Removing covers can expose you to high voltage and other dangerous conditions. Request a qualified service person to perform servicing.
  8. Repair—If any of the following conditions occurs, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, and request a qualified service person to perform repairs.
    a. When the power cord or plug is damaged.
    b. When a liquid was spilled on the product or when objects have fallen into the product.
    c. When the product has been exposed to rain or water.
    d. When the product has been dropped or damaged.
    e. When the product displays an abnormal condition. Any noticeable abnormality in the product indicates that the product needs servicing.
  9. Replacement parts—In case the product needs replacement parts, make sure that the service person uses replacement parts specified by the manufacturer, or those with the same characteristics and performance as the original parts. Use of unauthorized parts can result in fire, electric shock and/or other danger.
  10. Safety checks—Upon completion of service or repair work, request the service technician to perform safety checks to ensure that the product is in proper operating condition.
  11. Wall or ceiling mounting—When mounting the product on a wall or ceiling, be sure to install the product according to the method recommended by the manufacturer.
  12. Heat sources—Keep the product away from heat sources such as radiators, heaters, stoves and other heat-generating products (including amplifiers).
  13. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before installing the speakers (for PDP-5080HD only).
  14. Never expose the screen of the plasma display to a strong impact, for example, by hitting it. The screen may be broken, resulting in fire or personal injury.
  15. Do not expose the plasma display to direct sunlight for a long period of time. The optical characteristics of the front protection panel changes, resulting in discoloration or warp.
  16. The plasma display weighs about 40.3 kg (88.8 lbs.) for the PDP-5080HD (including the stand and speaker) and about 31.6 kg (69.7 lbs.) for the PDP-4280HD (including the stand). Because it has small depth and is unstable, unpack, carry, and install the product with one more person at least and use the handles.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Chapter 2 Safety Precautions - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Chapter 2 Safety Precautions - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Chapter 2 Safety Precautions - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Chapter 2 Safety Precautions - 5

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Chapter 2 Safety Precautions - 6

Safety Precautions

02

Installation Precautions

Observe the following precautions when installing with any items such as the optional bracket.

When using the optional brackets or equivalent items

  • Ask your dealer to perform the installation.
  • Be sure to use the supplied bolts.
  • For details, see the instruction manual that comes with the optional bracket (or equivalent items).

When using other items

  • Consult your dealer.
  • The following six mounting holes can be used for the installation:

Rear view (PDP-5080HD)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - When using other items - 1

text_image Mounting hole Mounting hole Median line Median line

Side view
PIONEER PDP5080HD - When using other items - 2

text_image Plasma display Mounting surface Mounting bracket (or equivalent item) M8 screw 12 mm to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inches)

Rear view (PDP-4280HD)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - When using other items - 3

text_image Mounting hole Mounting hole Median line Median line

Caution

  • Be sure to use four or more mounting holes symmetrical to the vertical and horizontal median lines.
  • Use M8 screws, which go 12 mm to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inches) in depth from the mounting surface of the plasma display. See the side view above.
  • Be careful not to block the ventilation opening at the rear of the plasma display.
  • Be sure to install the plasma display on a flat surface because it contains glass.
  • The screw holes other than the above are to be used only for the specified products. Never use them for mounting non-specified products.

Note

  • It is strongly recommended to use the optional Pioneer mounting products.
  • Pioneer shall not be liable for any personal injury or product damage that results from the use of mounting items other than the optional Pioneer products.

Supplied Accessories

Chapter 3 Supplied Accessories
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 1
Remote control unit

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 2
AA size batteries × 2 (Alkaline battery for remote control unit)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 3
Speed clamps × 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 4
Bead bands × 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 5
Cleaning cloth

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 6
Warranty card

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 7
Operating instructions

Screws (M4 x 10 mm) x 2 (for plastic bands)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 8

text_image (for plastic band) Plastic ba

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 9
Power cord (2 m/6.6 feet)

Speaker accessories
(for PDP-5080HD only)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 10

natural_image Two bundles of bundled cables with no text or symbols on the cables themselves

Speaker Mounting Fittings
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 11
Brackets for side × 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 12
Bracket for center

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 13
Speaker mounting screws (M5 × 10 mm: Black) × 9

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 14

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Supplied Accessories - 15

Part Names

Chapter 4

Part Names

Plasma display

(Front)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Plasma display - 1

text_image Side PDP-5080HD PDP-4280HD Side 1 2 3 4 5 6 Viewed from below of the display Viewed from the front side of the display

The terminals on side panels are common to the PDP-5080HD and PDP-4280HD.

1 ⏻ button
(See page 27.)
2 POWER ON indicator (See page 27.)
3 STANDBY indicator (See page 27.)
4 SLEEP indicator
5 Room Light Sensor
6 Remote control sensor
7 STANDBY/ON button

8 I N Button(TENTER button*)

9 VOLUME UP/DOWN buttons (UP/DOWN buttons*)

10 CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons (LEFT/RIGHT buttons\*)

11 TV GUIDE button*
12 USB port
13 PHONES output terminal
14 INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, P_B , P_R )
15 INPUT 3 terminal (VIDEO)
16 INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO)

The buttons with asterisks (*) can operate the TV Guide On Screen™ system.

04 Part Names

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Part Names - 1

text_image (Rear) PDP-5080HD PDP-4280HD 18 19 20 1 2 3 21 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 22 *For exact terminal positions, refer to the terminal position sheet located near the terminal compartment. 23 24 25 26 21 18 19 20 12 13 14 15 16 17 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

The terminals from 1 to 8 are the same as the PDP-5080HD.

1 CableCARD ^™ slot
2 ANT/CABLE A IN terminal
3 AC IN terminal
4 INPUT 4 terminal (HDMI)
5 INPUT 5 terminal (HDMI)
6 INPUT 6 terminal (HDMI)
7 INPUT 7 terminal (HDMI)
8 PC INPUT terminal (ANALOG RGB)
9 CONTROL OUT terminal
10 RS-232C terminal (used for factory setup)
11 ANT B IN terminal
12 INPUT 1 terminal (S-VIDEO)
13 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO)
14 SUB WOOFER terminal

15 AUDIO OUT terminals (AUDIO)
16 INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO)
17 INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO)
18 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO)
19 INPUT 5 terminals (AUDIO)
20 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO)
21 DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL)
22 PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO)
23 INPUT 2 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, PB, PR)
24 SPEAKERS (R/L) terminals
25 SPEAKERS (R) terminal (Speaker side)
26 SPEAKERS (L) terminal (Speaker side)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Part Names - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Part Names - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Part Names - 4

Part Names

Remote control unit

This section describes the functions of the buttons available when the mode switch has been set to TV. For the buttons for controlling other equipment, see Using the remote control unit to control other devices starting from page 84.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Remote control unit - 1

text_image TV INPUT 1 2 3 ANT HDMI 4 5 6 7 SCREEN AV SLECTION DISPLAY PC SIZE CAT/DVD MENU SAT GUIDE INFO MENU TV GUIDE DVO TOP MENU DAY + ENTER DAY HOMI CONTROL PAGE+ RETURN FONORITE CH A B C G 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 CH ENTER + CH RETURN + CH - VOL - << MUTTING - SOURCE - STOP REC - ○ □ ■ ● ○ INPUT - + SPLIT FREEZE SWAP SHIFT ADD MTS CH VCR /SAT TV - DVD - / DVD

Mode switch (with "TV" selected)

1 TV ☐: Turns on the power to the plasma display or places it into standby mode.
2 Transmission confirmation LED
3 I N : Select an input source of the plasma display. ("INPUT 1", "INPUT 2", "INPUT 3", "INPUT 4", "INPUT 5", "INPUT 6" and "INPUT 7")
4 SCREEN SIZE : Selects the screen size.
5 AV SELECTION : Selects audio and video settings. (AV source: OPTIMUM, STANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, USER, PC source: STANDARD, USER.)
6 I N: Display a channel banner when a TV program is being watched. When the TV Guide On Screen™ system is in operation, displays information about the currently highlighted channel (if available)
7 H O M : DispMys the HOME MENU screen. MENU: Displays a panel menu when the TV Guide On Screen™ system is in operation.
8 DAY +/- : Jumps to the next or previous day of program listings in the TV Guide On Screen™ Listing service.
9 ↑/▼: selects a desired item on the menu screen.
10 HDMI CONTROL : Displays the HDMI Control menu.
11 FAVORITE CH (A, B, C, D)

Selects any of the four preset channels. See page 43 for details to set the FAVORITE CH. While watching, you can toggle the set channels by pressing A, B, C and D.

12 0 to 9 : Selects the channel.

13 •(dot) : Enters a dot.

14 CH +/- : Selects the channel.

15 SPLIT : Switches the screen mode among 2-screen, picture-in-picture, and single-screen.

16 FREEZE : Freezes a frame from a moving image. Press again to cancel the function.

17 MTS : Selects MTS/SAP or language depending on the program being watched.

18 ANT : Selects the antenna (A, B). See page 24 for details.

19 PC : Selects the PC terminal as an input source.

20 DISPLAY : Displays the channel information.

21 TV GUIDE : Displays the TV Guide On Screen™ system.

22 ENTER : Executes a command.

23 PAGE +/- (for the TV Guide On Screen™ system): Scrolls the program listing screen vertically.

24 RETURN : Returns to the previous menu screen.

25 CH ENTER : Executes a channel number.

26 CH RETURN : Returns to the previous channel. This button is disabled while the TV Guide On Screen™ system is displayed.

27 VOL +/- : Sets the volume.

28 ☒ MUTING: Mutes the sound.

29 SHIFT : Moves the location of the small screen when in the picture-in-picture mode.

30 SWAP : Switches between the two screens when in the 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode.

Luminous remote control buttons

All buttons on the remote control unit are luminous and gather and store light. This enables quick access to the desired function when performing operations in dark places.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Remote control unit - 2

Note

  • When using the remote control unit, point it at the plasma display.
    • See pages 78 to 87 for operating buttons not listed on this page.

Preparation

Chapter 5

Preparation

Installing the plasma display
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Preparation - 1

text_image Over 50 cm (19 11/16 inches) Over 10 cm (315/16 inches)

Location

- Avoid direct sunlight. Maintain adequate ventilation.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Location - 1

Note

- Allow enough space around the upper and back parts when installing to ensure adequate ventilation of the rear of the unit.

Moving the plasma display

Because the plasma display is heavy, be sure to have someone help you when moving it.

(PDP-5080HD)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Moving the plasma display - 1

natural_image Line drawing showing hand positioning of a device with magnified views of the interior (no text or symbols)

(PDP-4280HD)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Moving the plasma display - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a hand inserting a component into a vehicle compartment (no text or symbols)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Moving the plasma display - 3

Caution

When installing on a rack, etc., hold the plasma display.

Installing the Pioneer speaker (PDP-5080HD)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Installing the Pioneer speaker (PDP-5080HD) - 1

Caution

- If you want to move the plasma display unit, make sure that you remove the speaker first. In addition, do not move the display holding on to the mounting fittings. This can result in injury or damage to the unit.

About the speaker

  • In order to prevent damage to the speaker system resulting from input overload, please observe the following precautions:
  • Do not use the speaker with anything other than the plasma display. Doing so may result in damage or fire.
  • Be sure to turn the connected devices off and remove the power cord from the power outlet beforehand when changing the connection or installation method.
  • When using a tone control function to greatly emphasize treble sounds, do not use excessive amplifier volume.
  • Please handle the speaker with sufficient care, as the grille net and the cabinet can become damaged or broken when they are subjected to strong external impacts.
  • Placing a CRT computer screen or CRT monitor near to the speaker may result in interference or color distortion. If this happens, distance the monitor from the speaker.

Installation

  • The speaker is wide, and may become unstable when installed by a one person alone. This may result in injury or product damage. Therefore, at least two people must assemble and install it.
  • When installing the speaker, do not use any screws other than those supplied, otherwise the speaker may come off from the main unit and fall over.
  • When installing the speaker, tighten the screws firmly.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Installation - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Installation - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Installation - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Installation - 4

Preparation

PDP-5080HD with the speaker installed (with the Pioneer table top stand)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Preparation - 1

text_image Speaker mounting screw (M5 x 10 mm) Speaker mounting screw (M5 x 10 mm) Speaker mounting fitting (side) Speaker mounting fitting (center) Speaker mounting fitting (side) Speaker Speaker mounting screw (M5 x 10 mm) Speaker mounting side Speaker mounting side Speaker mounting side Speaker cable Bead band

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Preparation - 2

Note

- Before installing the speaker, make sure that the Pioneer table top stand is attached to the plasma display.

1 Attach the speaker mounting fittings to the rear of the plasma display.

- Attach the fittings for right and left sides to the bottom right and left on the rear panel of the plasma display using the supplied screws.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Attach the speaker mounting fittings to the rear of the plasma display. - 1

text_image Speaker mounting screw (M5 x 10 mm) ① Tighten the screw in the upper screw hole first. ② Then, tighten the screw in the screw hole right under the upper holo.

Speaker mounting fitting for side (It shows the attachment of the fitting on the left side. It is attached on the right side by the same procedure.)

- Attach the fitting for center to the lower center on the rear panel of the plasma display using the two supplied screws.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Attach the speaker mounting fittings to the rear of the plasma display. - 2

text_image ② Then, tighten the screw in the oval-shaped screw hole. Speaker mounting screw (M5 x 10 mm) Speaker mounting fitting for center ① Tighten the screw in the round- shaped hole first.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Attach the speaker mounting fittings to the rear of the plasma display. - 3

05

Preparation

2 Fit the speaker to the mounting fittings in the correct direction.

- Be sure not to mount the speaker upside down.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Fit the speaker to the mounting fittings in the correct direction. - 1

text_image Protective wrapping Front side of the speaker The side with the padding strip is facing upwards. For illustrative purposes, the table top stand is not presented here. Insert the groove on the back of the speaker into the speaker mounting fitting.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Fit the speaker to the mounting fittings in the correct direction. - 2

Caution

  • To avoid any damage to the speaker and/or table top stand from striking against each other, fit the speaker to the mounting fittings while confirming their locations. As you may easily strike the stand, use the protective wrapping in which the speaker was wrapped between the speaker and stand.
  • When the speaker mounting fittings do not fit the grooves at the rear of the speaker, adjust the speaker mounting fittings angle.

3 Tighten from back using the supplied screws (three locations).

Tighten the three screws in order ①, ②, ③ as shown in the diagram.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Tighten from back using the supplied screws (three locations). - 1

text_image Speaker mounting screw (M5 x 10 mm) Speaker mounting screw (M5 x 10 mm) When using the table top stand, do not use these holes. Speaker mounting screw (M5 x 10 mm)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Tighten from back using the supplied screws (three locations). - 2

Caution

- If you want to move the plasma display, make sure that you remove the speaker first. In addition, do not move the plasma display holding on to the mounting fittings. This can result in injury or damage to the unit.

The screw hole at the bottom of the speaker mounting fitting is used when the plasma display is installed on the wall. It is not used when installed with the stand.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Caution - 1

Note

- If after attaching the speaker its position needs to be adjusted horizontally or vertically, first loosen the speaker mounting screws, reposition and then tighten the screws again at the appropriate position.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

Preparation

4 Connect the supplied speaker cables to the rear of plasma display.

Connect the cables correctly with respect to the polarity of the plasma display speaker terminals, that is, ⊕ cable (Gray) to ⊕ terminals (Red) and ⊖ cable (Black) to ⊖ terminals (Black).

5 Connect the other end of the speaker cables to the speaker.

Connect the cables correctly with respect to the polarity of the speaker terminals, that is, ⊕ cable (Gray) to ⊕ terminals (Red) and ⊖ cable (Black) to ⊖ terminals (Black).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connect the other end of the speaker cables to the speaker. - 1

text_image Gray Black Gray Red Black Red Speaker terminal Speaker cable Speaker terminal Speaker terminal

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connect the other end of the speaker cables to the speaker. - 2

Note

  • Press the lever and insert the end of the cable.
  • When you release the lever, it clamps onto the speaker cable.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

Caution

  • Be sure to turn the connected devices off and remove the power cord from the wall outlet beforehand when changing the connection or installation method.
  • If you insert the speaker cable too far so that the insulation is touching the speaker terminal, you may not get any sound. Please insert it with showing the copper wire.
  • Check if the end of the speaker cables are securely connected to the terminals by slightly tugging on the cable after making connections. Loose connections may result in sound dropouts or noise.
  • If there is a short in the and cables caused by an exposed lead wire, excessive load may be applied to the plasma display, resulting in interrupted operation or malfunction.
  • Incorrect connections of the speaker cable to the right or left of the plasma display terminals with respect to the polarity may result in insufficient stereo sound effects, delivering poor bass sounds or unstable sound image.
  • Bundle the cable without pulling.

6 Bundle the cables.

  • Bead bands are included with the plasma display.
  • Use the bead bands as necessary.
  • When tidying up your speaker cables, make sure to bundle them so that they are not subjected to any pressure.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Bundle the cables. - 1

text_image Rear view Speaker cableBead band

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Bundle the cables. - 2

Preparation

When using the hung on wall unit:

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When using the hung on wall unit: - 1

Note

- First lay the plasma display on top of a soft sheet etc., remove the stand, then attach the speaker mounting fittings.

1 Attach the speaker mounting fittings to the rear of the plasma display (See procedure 1 on page 17.
2 Connect the supplied speaker cables to the rear of the plasma display (See procedure 4 on page 19).
3 Place the plasma display on the mounting fittings of the hung on wall unit. For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the hung on wall unit.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

Caution

  • Be careful about the speaker mounting fittings when installing or connecting. This may result in injury.
    4 Connect the other end of the speaker cables to the speaker (See procedure 5 on page 19).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Caution - 1

Caution

- Have two people perform this procedure.

5 Fit the speaker to the mounting fittings the correct direction.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Caution - 1

Caution

  • Be sure not to mount the speaker upside down.
    6 Tighten from below using the supplied screws (three locations).

- Tighten the three screws in order ①, ②, ③ as shown in the diagram. The screw hole at the rear surface of the speaker mounting fitting is used when the plasma display is installed with the table top stand. It is not used when installed with the stand.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Caution - 1

Note

  • If after attaching the speaker its position needs to be adjusted horizontally, first loosen the speaker mounting screws, reposition and then tighten the screws again at the appropriate position.
    7 Bundle the cables (See procedure 6 on page 19).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

text_image Speaker mounting screw (M5 x 10 mm) When using the hung on wall unit, do not use this hole. Speaker mounting screw (M5 x 10 mm) Speaker mounting screw (M5 x 10 mm)

En

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

Preparation

Preventing the plasma display from falling over

After installing the stand, be sure to take special care to ensure that the plasma display will not fall over and is stabilized to both the wall and rack.

Stabilizing on a table or rack

Stabilize the plasma display as shown in the diagram using the supplied plastic bands and screws.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Stabilizing on a table or rack - 1

Note

- To stabilize the plasma display on a table or rack, also use commercially available wood screws that have a nominal diameter of 4 mm (5/32 inch) and that are at least 20 mm (13/16 inch) long.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

text_image 8 mm to 15 mm (3/8 inch to 5/8 inch) 4 mm (5/32 inch) 20 mm min. (13/16 inch min) Supplied screw (M4 x 10 mm) Wood screw (commercially available, 4 mm x 20 mm min.) (5/32 inch x 13/16 inch min.) Supplied screw Wood screw

Drill a hole in the middle at the rear of the tabletop panel before using a wood screw. Perform this work the same way on the left and right sides.

Using a wall for stabilization

1 Attach falling prevention bolts (hooks) to the plasma display.

2 Use strong cords to stabilize it appropriately and firmly to a wall, pillar, or other sturdy element.

Perform this work in the same way on the left and right sides.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Using a wall for stabilization - 1

Note

- Use hooks, cords and fittings that are available on the market. Recommended hook: Nominal diameter 8 mm (3/8 inch), length 12 mm to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inches)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

text_image 12 mm to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inches) M8 1.Hook 2.Cord Fitting

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

Caution

  • A table or rack with adequate strength should always be used to support the plasma display. Failure to do so could result in personal injury and physical damage.
  • When installing the plasma display, please take the necessary safety measures to prevent it from falling or overturning in case of emergencies, such as earthquakes, or of accidents.
  • If you do not take these precautions, the plasma display could fall down and cause injury.
  • The screws, hooks, cords and other fittings that you use to secure the plasma display to prevent it from overturning will vary according to the composition and thickness of the surface to which it will be attached.
  • Select the appropriate screws, hooks, cords, and other fittings after first inspecting the surface carefully to determine its thickness and composition and after consulting a professional installer if necessary.

Preparation

Attaching/detaching the Pioneer stand

The plasma display comes with the Pioneer table top stand attached. You can also install the display on a rack by detaching the stand. The method for attaching/detaching the stand varies depending on the product.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Attaching/detaching the Pioneer stand - 1

Caution

  • This product can be used only with the attached stand. Using other stands can result in instability, possibly causing injury.
  • The weight of a 50 inch plasma display is about 34.8 kg (76.7 lbs.) and a 42 inch about 29.9 kg (65.9 lbs.). It has no depth, and is unstable. Therefore, at least two people must assemble and install it.

Detaching the stand

  • When removing the stand before you install the speaker, begin with step 2 (for PDP-5080HD).
  • Begin with step 2 for PDP-4280HD.
  • Besides the speaker, steps for detaching the stand are the same for PDP-5080HD and PDP-4280HD. Illustrations shown are for PDP-5080HD.

1 Detach the supplied speaker if it has already been installed.

- To detach the speaker, remove the cable wiring for the speaker at the rear and screws at the rear of the speaker and pull it out (see step 3 on page 18).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Detach the supplied speaker if it has already been installed. - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a flat-screen monitor mounted on a stand with paper sheets, showing no text or symbols.
  • Use the protective sheet in which the speaker was wrapped between the speaker and stand.
  • Make sure to remove the speaker mounting fittings.

2 With the plasma display lying flat, loosen and remove the two installation bolts (1) and (2) using a screwdriver.

Installation bolts (1): M8 x 23 mm (black) for PDP-4280HD M8 x 23 mm (black) for PDP-5080HD

Installation bolts (2): M8 x 60 mm (black) for PDP-4280HD M8 x 40 mm (black) for PDP-5080HD

PIONEER PDP5080HD - With the plasma display lying flat, loosen and remove the two installation bolts (1) and (2) using a screwdriver. - 1

text_image Installat on bolts (1) (Step 1) Installation bolts (2) (Step 2) Table top stand Sheet

3 Remove the stand from the plasma display.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Remove the stand from the plasma display. - 1

Note

  • Make sure to keep the installation bolts (1) and (2) that have been removed as they are re-used when attaching the stand to the plasma display.
  • Place a sheet or protective cover to protect the display from scratches or damage.
    • Work only with the plasma display lying flat on a table or similar surface.
  • When lying the plasma display down, be careful not to scratch or damage it.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 5

Preparation

Attaching the stand again

  • When the plasma display is mounted without the supplied speaker, begin with step 2 (for PDP-5080HD).
  • Begin with step 2 for PDP-4280HD.
  • Besides the speaker, steps for attaching the stand are the same for PDP-5080HD and PDP-4280HD (use the screw holes with "T" inscribed). Illustrations shown are for PDP-5080HD.

1 Detach the supplied speaker when the plasma display is being mounted on the wall, with the speaker attached.

- To detach the speaker, remove the cable wiring for the speaker at the rear and screws at the bottom of the speaker and pull it out (see illustrations on page 20).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Detach the supplied speaker when the plasma display is being mounted on the wall, with the speaker attached. - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a flat-screen monitor and its rear panel with directional arrows indicating assembly or movement (no text or symbols)

2 With the plasma display lying flat, fit the stand's support columns to the bottom of the plasma display as indicated by the arrows, then slowly insert them.

- Be extremely careful not to insert the support columns of the stand into any part of the plasma display other than the stand insertion slots. Doing so might damage the plasma display panel or its ports or result in warping of the stand.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - With the plasma display lying flat, fit the stand's support columns to the bottom of the plasma display as indicated by the arrows, then slowly insert them. - 1

text_image Line up the column supports with the bottom of the plasma display, as indicated in the accompanying diagram. Plasma display Insert the stand into the plasma. display so that an arrow with "FRONT/FACE AVANT" mark inscribed at the bottom of the stand indicates down ward. Shoot

3 Attach the stand at the points indicated by the arrows and tighten the installation bolts (2) and (1) firmly using a screwdriver.

Installation bolts (1): M8 x 23 mm (black) for PDP-4280HD M8 x 23 mm (black) for PDP-5080HD Installation bolts (2): M8 x 60 mm (black) for PDP-4280HD M8 x 40 mm (black) for PDP-5080HD

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Attach the stand at the points indicated by the arrows and tighten the installation bolts (2) and (1) firmly using a screwdriver. - 1

text_image Screw hole with "T" inscribed Installation bolts (1) (Step 2) Installation bolts (2) (Step 1)

4 Replace the plasma display to stand upright. For speaker installation, see "Installing the Pioneer speaker" on page 16 (PDP-5080HD only).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Replace the plasma display to stand upright. For speaker installation, see "Installing the Pioneer speaker" on page 16 (PDP-5080HD only). - 1

Note

  • Be sure to install the plasma display in a flat, stable location.
  • Insert the screws into the holes vertically and tighten them.
  • Place a sheet or protective cover to protect the display from scratches or damage.
    • Work only with the plasma display lying flat on a table or similar surface.
  • When lying the plasma display down, be careful not to scratch or damage it.

Preparation

Cable connections for watching digital and/or conventional TV channels

This system is equipped with two terminals for inputting TV broadcasting signals: ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN. The ANT/CABLE A IN terminal accepts both digital and conventional TV broadcasting signals while the ANT B IN terminal accepts only conventional TV broadcasting signals. When using cable TV to watch digital and/or conventional TV channels, connect to the ANT/CABLE A IN terminal as shown. In addition, you may connect an antenna to the ANT B IN terminal as shown; use an outdoor antenna to enjoy clearer pictures. If your outdoor antenna uses a 75-ohm coaxial cable with an F-type connector, plug it into the antenna terminal at the rear of the plasma display.

Connecting VHF/UHF antennas and a Cable
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Cable connections for watching digital and/or conventional TV channels - 1

text_image VHF antenna U/Vmixer VHF UHF UHF antenna Rear view Coaxial Coaxial Cable TV

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Cable connections for watching digital and/or conventional TV channels - 2

Note

  • Be sure to connect coaxial cables as shown above. Signal reception may fail if not properly connected.
  • In order to watch cable TV channels, be sure to connect the cable to the ANT/CABLE A IN terminal.
  • The ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN terminals must not receive the same signals. For example, do not connect a cable from a cable TV to both the ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN terminals. Similarly, do not connect a cable from an antenna to both the ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN terminals.
  • TV Guide may not be available in all areas and is not available with satellite systems. In addition, as content providers move to digital programming and broadcasting, TV Guide Data may be unavailable or become unavailable.

Inserting the CableCARD™

The plasma display is equipped with a slot for inserting a CableCARD™. When you are watching digital and/or High Definition TV channels over cable, the card allows you to use the POD service provided by the cable TV company; the POD stands for Point of Deployment. This service presents various types of useful information, using HTML text.

1 Confirm that the ANT/CABLE A IN terminal has been connected with the coaxial cable from the Cable Converter.
2 Hold and push the tab of the slot cover on the rear of the plasma display leftward, and remove the cover while pulling the tab's latch downward.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Inserting the CableCARD™ - 1

text_image (Viewed from below of the plasma display) Tab ① ②

3 Insert the specified CableCARD™ into the Cable CARD slot as far as it goes.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Inserting the CableCARD™ - 2

natural_image Diagram showing a mechanical component being inserted into a rectangular plate, with no visible text or symbols.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Inserting the CableCARD™ - 3

Note

  • Be sure to insert only the specified CableCARD™.
  • Do not insert a PC card.
  • When you use a CableCARD™, you need not execute Auto Channel Preset; the CableCARD™ automatically generates a cable channel list.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 5

Preparation

Routing cables

When the speaker is installed under the plasma display panel (for PDP-5080HD only)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Routing cables - 1

text_image Rear view Speaker cable Bead band

Attaching speed clamps to the main unit

Attach the speed clamps using the three holes (42 inches: two holes) marked with below, depending on your routing system.

for PDP-5080HD
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Attaching speed clamps to the main unit - 1

text_image Technical diagram of a computer rear panel with labeled components and directional arrows indicating assembly or movement.

for PDP-4280HD
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Attaching speed clamps to the main unit - 2

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an inset view showing a pin and mounting bracket (no text or symbols)

Attaching and removing speed clamps

Insert [1] into an appropriate hole on the rear of the plasma display and snap [2] into the back of [1] to lock the clamp. Speed clamps are designed to be difficult to undo once in place. Please attach them carefully.

Use pliers to twist the clamp 90°, pulling outward. The clamp may deteriorate over time and become damaged if removed.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Attaching and removing speed clamps - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Attaching and removing speed clamps - 2

Note

  • Use the supplied bead bands and speed clamps as necessary.
  • When tidying up your speaker cables, make sure to bundle them so that they are not subjected to any pressure.

Connecting the power cord

Connect the power cord after all component connections have been completed.

Plasma display (rear view)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connecting the power cord - 1

text_image AC IN terminal is located on the upper edge of the compartment.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connecting the power cord - 2

Caution

  • Use only the supplied power cord.
  • Be sure to use the specified power supply voltage; neglecting this can result in fire or electric shock.
  • For the plasma display, a three-core power cord with a ground terminal is used for efficient protection. Always connect the power cord to a three-pronged outlet and make sure that the cord is properly grounded.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Caution - 1

text_image Power cord Noise filter Partially eliminates noise caused by the power source.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Caution - 2

Note

• Always turn off the power of the plasma display when connecting or disconnecting power cords.
- Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet when the plasma display is not going to be used for a long period of time.

Preparation

Preparing the remote control unit

Inserting batteries

1 Open the battery cover.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Inserting batteries - 1

2 Load the supplied two AA size batteries while inserting their respective negative polarity (−) ends first.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Inserting batteries - 2

natural_image Illustration of a battery pack with two cylindrical cells and a tray, no text or symbols present

- The battery polarities must correspond with the (+) and (−) indicators in the battery compartment.

3 Close the battery cover.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Inserting batteries - 3

Cautions regarding batteries

  • The remote control unit cannot operate the system if the batteries in the unit are weak. When this happens, replace the batteries with new ones.
  • When you replace the batteries, use alkaline batteries for the remote control unit.
  • Do not mix batteries of different types. Different types of batteries have different characteristics.
  • Do not mix old and new batteries. Mixing old and new batteries can shorten the life of new batteries or cause chemical leakage in old batteries.
  • Do not leave dead batteries in the remote control unit; chemical leakage will occur. If you find any chemical leakage, wipe thoroughly with a cloth.
  • The batteries supplied with this product may have a shorter life expectancy due to storage conditions.
  • If you will not use the remote control unit for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from it.

Battery disposal

When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institution's rules that apply in your country/area.

Allowed operation range of the remote control unit

Operate the remote control unit while pointing it toward the remote control sensor located at the bottom right of the front panel of the plasma display. The distance from the remote control sensor must be within 7 m (23 feet) and the angle relative to the sensor must be within 30 degrees in the right or left direction.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Allowed operation range of the remote control unit - 1

text_image 7 m (23 feet) 30° 30° Remote control sensor

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Allowed operation range of the remote control unit - 2

Note

- For the remote control sensor located on the PDP 4280HD, see Part Names on page 13.

Cautions regarding the remote control unit

  • Do not expose the remote control unit to shock, liquid, or high humidity.
  • Do not place the remote control unit under direct sunlight; the unit may deform.
  • The remote control unit may not work properly if the remote sensor window of the plasma display is under direct sunlight or strong lighting. In such case, change the angle of the lighting or plasma display, or operate the remote control unit closer to the remote sensor window.
  • When any obstacle exists between the remote control unit and the remote control sensor, the remote control unit may not function.
  • As the batteries become weak, the remote control unit can function within a shorter distance from the remote control sensor. Replace the batteries with new ones if necessary.
  • The plasma display emits very weak infrared rays from its screen. If you place such equipment operated through infrared remote control as a VCR nearby, that equipment may not receive commands from its remote control unit properly or entirely. If this is the case, place that equipment at a location far enough from the plasma display.
  • Depending on the installation environment, infrared rays from the plasma display may not allow this system to properly receive commands from the remote control unit or may shorten allowable distances between the remote control unit and the remote control sensor. The strength of infrared rays emitted from the screen differs, depending on images displayed on the screen.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Cautions regarding the remote control unit - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Cautions regarding the remote control unit - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Cautions regarding the remote control unit - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Cautions regarding the remote control unit - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Cautions regarding the remote control unit - 5

Basic Operations

Chapter 6

Basic Operations

Turning on the power

  • Press ⏻ on the plasma display when the POWER ON and STANDBY indicators are off.
    • The POWER ON indicator on the plasma display lights up bule.
  • Press TV ⏻ on the remote control unit or STANDBY/ON on the plasma display when the STANDBY indicator lights up red.
  • The POWER ON indicator on the plasma display lights up blue.

Turning off the power

(to standby mode)

1 Press TV ⏻ on the remote control unit or STANDBY/ON on the plasma display.

  • The system enters the standby mode and the image on the screen disappears.
    • The STANDBY indicator lights up red.
  • This will allow the system to automatically receive digital TV program information while in the standby mode.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Turning off the power - 1

Note

- If you are not going to use this system for a long period of time, remove the power cord from the power outlet.

Plasma display status indicators

The table below shows the operational status of the plasma display. You can check the current status of the system with the indicators on the plasma display.

Indicator Status System Status

POWER ON STANDBY
The power cord of the plasma display has been disconnected. Or, the power cord of the plasma display has been connected but the ⏻ button of the plasma display is off.
Power to the system is on.
The system is in the standby mode.

For other than the above, see Troubleshooting on page 88.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Plasma display status indicators - 1

Note

- You can select "Auto", "High", "Mid" or "Low" for the brightness of the POWER ON indicator. When "Auto" is selected, the brightness of the indicator changes to "High", "Mid" or "Low" to match the brightness level of the viewing area. For details, see Blue LED Dimmer on page 63.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

Caution

  • While the POWER ON and STANDBY indicators are off, the system cannot be placed into the power-on mode even when TV or STANDBY/ON button is pressed. Press on the plasma display.
  • The plasma display will still consume some power as long as the power cord is inserted into the power outlet.

Plasma display

(PDP-5080HD)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Plasma display - 1

text_image button POWER ON indicator STANDBY indicator ON STANDBY

(PDP-4280HD)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Plasma display - 2

text_image POWER ON indicator STANDBY indicator button

Viewed from below of the display (left).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Plasma display - 3

text_image STANDBY/ON button

(Right side view)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Plasma display - 4

text_image TV INPUT 1 2 3 ANT COM 4 5 6 7 SCREEN A SELECTOR DISPLAY PC SIZE SALUND MENU SAL GUIDI HOME MENU TV MENU TV GUIDE INFO OHF TOP MENU PAGE+

Basic Operations

Watching TV channels

Unless you set up TV channels that you can watch under the current conditions, you cannot tune in those channels. For the procedure, see Setting up TV channels on page 37.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Watching TV channels - 1

Note

- When watching a digital TV program, you may see emergency alert messages scrolling at the top of the screen. Those messages are broadcasted by TV stations as necessary when in emergency situations.

Selecting the antenna

After confirming that the Mode switch on the remote control unit has been set to "TV", press ANT on the remote control unit to select antenna A or B.

  • Make this selection depending on the connections to the antenna input terminals at the rear of the plasma display (page 24).
  • While watching a broadcast, press ANT to view the image received from the other antenna.
  • Pressing ANT while watching in the multiscreen mode (TV image and video image) with TV selected will display the TV image of the other antenna.
  • Pressing ANT while watching in the multiscreen mode with two TV images displayed will not have any effect.

Changing channels

To increase the channel number, press CH + on the remote control unit. To decrease the channel number, press CH -,

  • CHANNEL +/- on the plasma display operates the same as CH +/- on the remote control unit.
  • Press CH RETURN to switch the currently tuned channel to the previously tuned channel. Press CH RETURN again to restore the currently tuned channel.

Using 0 to 9 and • (dot) on the remote control unit

Select channels directly by pressing buttons 0 to 9. To select subchannels, also use the • (dot) button.

EXAMPLE

• To select channel 5 (one-digit channel), press 5.
• To select channel 25 (two-digit channel), press 2 then 5.
• To select channel 125 (three-digit channel), press 1, 2, then 5.
• To select subchannel 10.01, press 1, 0, • (dot), 0, then 1.
• To select subchannel 10.001 (for cable TV), press 1.0,
• (dot), 0, 0, then 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - EXAMPLE - 1

Note

• After entering a channel or subchannel number, you may press CH ENTER to tune in the channel more quickly.
• Each time you change a channel, a channel banner appears that shows information about the currently selected channel. To clear the channel banner, press INFO.
- If you do not setup the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the channel banner may not display certain types of program information.

Plasma display (right side view)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

text_image LP DOWN CHANNEL LEFT LEFT CHANNEL +/-

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

text_image TV INPUT 1 2 3 ANT HDMI 4 5 6 7 SCREEN AV RELIUM DISPLAY PC SIZE GAT/WD MENU HOME MENU METHU DAT SLIDE TV SLIDE INFO DVD TOT MENU PAGE+ DAY - HDMI CONTROL PAGE- RETURN FANTORTE CH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 CH + CH RETURN + CH - CE MTRNO + VOL - -

Channel banner

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 5

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 6

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 7

Basic Operations

Changing the volume and sound

VOLUME +/- on the plasma display operates the same as VOL +/- on the remote control unit.

Plasma display (right side view)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the volume and sound - 1

text_image NUT EN10 VOLUME UP DOWN CHANNEL RIGHT VOLUME +/-

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the volume and sound - 2

text_image CH CH RETURN VOL MUTING

To increase the volume, press VOL + on the remote control unit. To decrease the volume, press VOL -.

Volume adjustment display
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the volume and sound - 3

To mute the sound output, press MUTING. "Occurs on the screen. To quit muting, press MUTING again. Pressing VOL + also quits muting.

Muting display
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the volume and sound - 4

Changing the language

If you have selected a digital TV program that provides multi-language services, you can switch among the languages by pressing MTS on the remote control unit.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the language - 1

text_image SOURCE STOP REC RECEIVER VOL INPUT + SPLIT FREEZE SWAP SHIFT EDIT MTS CAL VCR /SAT DIF /DRR TV

Each time you press MTS, the language switches.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the language - 2

Note

  • Switchable languages differ depending on the current broadcast.
  • If the language selected through language setting is available when the channel or program is changed, you will hear that language.
  • If you are watching a digital TV program without sound or language information, "N/A" appears on the screen. With a language other than English, French, and Spanish are selected, "Others" will appear.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 4

Basic Operations

Setting MTS/SAP mode

When watching conventional TV programs, you may enjoy stereo sound and/or Secondary Audio Programs (SAP), using the Multi-channel Television Sound (MTS) function.

- Stereo broadcasts

You can enjoy, for example, sports, shows, and concerts in dynamic stereo sound.

- SAP broadcasts

MAIN sound: The normal program soundtrack (either in mono or stereo).

SAP sound: Listen to second language, supplementary commentary and other information. (SAP is mono sound.)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - - SAP broadcasts - 1

Note

  • Conventional TV channels in this manual designate TV channels that are received through the conventional VHF/UHF frequencies or conventional cable TV channels.
  • When stereo sound is difficult to hear, you may manually switch to the MONO mode to obtain clearer sound.
  • Once the MONO mode is selected, the plasma display sound remains mono even if the system receives a stereo broadcast. You must reselect the STEREO mode if you want to hear stereo sound again.
  • Selecting MTS while the input source is INPUT 1 to INPUT 7 or PC does not change the type of sound. In this case, sound is determined by the video source.
  • The MTS button is disabled while the TV Guide On Screen™ system is displayed.
  • In each of the MTS/SAP modes selected, the display changes depend on broadcast signals being received.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

text_image SOURCE STOP REC RECEIVER VCC INPUT + R/PUT FREEZE SWAP SHIFT EDIT M15 CBL VCR /ATI DVD TV DIR

Each time you press MTS, MTS toggles as shown below.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

flowchart
graph LR
    A["STEREO mode"] --> B["SAP mode"]
    B --> C["MONO mode"]

When receiving STEREO sound signals

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving STEREO sound signals - 1
In STEREO mode

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving STEREO sound signals - 2
In SAP mode

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving STEREO sound signals - 3
In MONO mode

When receiving MONO + SAP sound signals

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving MONO + SAP sound signals - 1
In STEREO mode

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving MONO + SAP sound signals - 2
In SAP mode

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving MONO + SAP sound signals - 3
In MONO mode

When receiving STEREO + SAP sound signals

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving STEREO + SAP sound signals - 1
In STEREO mode

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving STEREO + SAP sound signals - 2
In SAP mode

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving STEREO + SAP sound signals - 3
In MONO mode

When receiving MONO sound signals

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving MONO sound signals - 1
In STEREO mode

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving MONO sound signals - 2
In SAP mode

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving MONO sound signals - 3
In MONO mode

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving MONO sound signals - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving MONO sound signals - 5

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving MONO sound signals - 6

PIONEER PDP5080HD - When receiving MONO sound signals - 7

Basic Operations

Viewing a channel banner

While watching a TV program, pressing INFO causes the following banner to appear. Pressing INFO again causes the banner to disappear:

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Viewing a channel banner - 1

text_image INFO SAT/IND MENU HOME MENU MENU SAT GUIDE TV GUIDE END TOP MENU DAY + PAGE+ ENTER PAGE- RETURN DAY - HOME CONTROL 12:33pm DTV 2 • 1002.102 - A XXXXXXXXX 12:30pm — 2:00pm XXX 5 6 4 3 2 1

1 Station name
2 Current time
3 Channel number
4 Input (AnL. A or AnL. B)
5 Program title
6 Program time schedule
7 Channel logo
8 TV rating name or icon

Note

  • The above information is not displayed if not included in broadcast signals.
  • If you do not setup the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the channel banner may not display certain types of program information.

Using the POD service

If you have watched digital and/or High Definition TV channels over cable, you can use the POD service provided by the cable TV company. This service presents various types of useful information, using HTML text.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Using the POD service - 1

text_image INFO SAT/ DVD MENU HOME MENU MENU SAT GUIDE TV GUIDE DVD TOP MENU PAGE + DAY + ENTER PAGE - RETURN DAY - HDMI CONTROL FAVORITE CH 1 2 3 4 -5 6 7 8 9

Press HOME MENU, 9, 9, then 9 to view the POD display.

Using the multiscreen functions

Splitting the screen

Use the following procedure to select the 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode.

2-screen

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Splitting the screen - 1

natural_image Two black-and-white photos: one showing a person kicking a soccer ball on the field, the other showing a distant landscape with a small boat and hills (no visible text or symbols)

Picture-in-picture

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Splitting the screen - 2

natural_image Black-and-white photo of a baseball pitcher in action on the field, with spectators and a close-up inset showing a close-up of the pitcher's body (no visible text or symbols)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Splitting the screen - 3

text_image TV INPUT 1 2 3 ANT HDMI 4 5 6 7 SCREEN AI SELECTION DISPLAY PC SIZE SAT/DVD MENU SAT GUIDE VOL + CH RETURN VOL - OR MUTING - I-→→→→→→→→ SOURCE →STOP REC - ○ II ● RECEIVER VOL INPUT - + SPLIT FREEZE SWAP SHIFT CDT MTS CTR VCR SAT /SAT TV - /SW

1 Press SPLIT to select the display mode.

• Each time you press SPLIT, the display mode is switched among 2-screen, picture-in-picture, and single-screen.

06

Basic Operations

- In 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode, press SWAP to switch the position of the two screens shown. Left screen is the active screen which will be indicated by "The user is allowed to operate picture and sound.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Basic Operations - 1

natural_image Sequence of four black-and-white photos showing a person in motion, with no visible text or symbols.

- In picture-in-picture mode, press SHIFT to move the position of the small screen in anti-clockwise.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Basic Operations - 2

natural_image Four-panel sequence showing a baseball pitcher in action, with no visible text or symbols

2 To select the desired input source, press the appropriate input source button.

- If watching TV programs, press CH +/- to change the channel.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - To select the desired input source, press the appropriate input source button. - 1

Note

  • The SPLIT button is disabled while the TV Guide On Screen™ system is displayed.
  • The multiscreen function cannot display images from the same input source or two external input sources at the same time. If you make such an attempt, a warning message appears.
  • When you press HOME MENU, the single-screen mode is restored and the corresponding menu is displayed.
  • When the two screens show the same analog broadcasting coming through antenna A and B, the picture quality may differ between the two screens.
  • Displaying pictures in multi-screen mode for an extended period may cause an after-image.

Freezing images

Use the following procedure to capture and freeze one frame from a moving image that you are watching.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Freezing images - 1

text_image Moving image Still image

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Freezing images - 2

text_image SOURCE STOP REC RECEIVER VOL SPLIT FREEZE SWAF SHIFT EDIT MTS CBL VCR /SAI /DVD TV - /DVI

1 Press FREEZE.

- A still image appears on the right screen while a moving image is shown on the left screen.

2 Press FREEZE again to cancel the function.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press FREEZE again to cancel the function. - 1

Note

  • With the screen split, any image cannot be frozen.
  • When you try to use this function when it is not available, a warning message appears.
  • Image FREEZE is canceled automatically if you do not perform any operation for five minutes.
  • Displaying pictures in FREEZE mode for an extended period may cause an after-image.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 5

TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup

Chapter 7

TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup

About the TV Guide On Screen™ system

The TV Guide On Screen™ system is a free, interactive on-screen television program guide. The system offers program listings, searching by keyword, reminders and more. The TV Guide On Screen™ system is a convenient way to find out what's on right now or during the coming week, by channel or by genre. It also allows you to automatically set your viewing and recording selections quickly and easily.

Before you can start using the TV Guide On Screen™ system, you'll need to set it up.

In the United States, TV Guide and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. In Canada, TV Guide is a registered mark of Transcontinental, Inc. and is used under license by Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Legal Notices - 1

Note

  • The TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide provides listings for cable ready and digital cable services as well as over-the-air broadcast. It does not provide listings for satellite services.
  • Depending on the current settings and selected items, the order of the setup screens may differ from the one given in this manual. Follow the instructions shown on the screens.
  • TV Guide may not be available in all areas. As content providers move to digital programming and broadcasting, TV Guide data may be unavailable or become unavailable.

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system

When the plasma display is powered on for the very first time, you are automatically taken through the setup process. Immediately thereafter the TV Guide On Screen™ setup process begins, starting with the Welcome Screen. Setup may be accessed from the initial Setup reminder screens, or by pressing TV GUIDE for a device in which TV Guide On Screen™ has not yet been setup.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system - 1

Note

- Once you set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system it may take up to 24 hours to begin to receive TV program listings. Receipt of all eight days of listings may take up to one week (see Screen 7).

Welcome Screen

Initial TV set up leads you to the Welcome screen.

Or press TV GUIDE to begin setup.

• The Welcome Screen lists features in the Guide.
- Press ENTER to display Screen 1 (shown on the right column of this page).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Welcome Screen - 1

text_image TV GUIDE On Screen interactive program guide Built-in to this TV! ► 8 days of listings ► Powerful show searches ► One-touch recordings ► Subscription free TV made easy. Just press OK on your remote to begin! START ►

Reminder Screen

If you previously skipped Guide setup, you see the Reminder Screen when you power on your TV.

To make a selection, press 🔊 to highlight an option, and press ENTER.

  • "Start setup" displays Screen 1.
  • "Remind me to set it up later" returns you to watching TV.
  • "Don't remind me again" returns you to watching TV and stops the reminder screen from appearing upon power on.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Reminder Screen - 1

text_image TV GUIDE ON Screen interactive program guide Built-in to this TV! • 8 days of listings • Powerful show searches • Subscription free Highlight an option and press OK on your remote. Start setup Remind me to set up later Don't remind me again

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Reminder Screen - 2

Note

- If you decide not to set up the Guide now, this reminder screen will appear each time you power on the TV (except if you selected "Don't remind me again").

07 TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup

System Setup Screens

Screen 1: Select Country

• This screen asks you the location of your TV.
- Press to highlight a country.
- Press ENTER to make the selection.
- Press → highlight Next.
- Press ENTER to display Screen 2.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Screen 1: Select Country - 1

text_image TV GOOME Identifying Your Location For help press INFO On the following screen, you will be asked to select the appropriate item(s) from a list. Use your TV remote control: arrow keys and the OK key to take you through the setup steps. Press the HBO key whenever you would like details. Which country is your TV located in? ✓ USA Canada Next

Screen 2: Enter ZIP or Postal Code

  • If you selected USA in Screen 1, you see the ZIP Code screen.
  • Input ZIP Code by either

- pressing the number keys or

- pressing ↗to scroll through numbers, and then to → move to the next character field and Next.

  • You can select the Back button from any screen to return to the previous setup screens to correct or review the information you entered.
  • Press ENTER to display Screen 3.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Screen 2: Enter ZIP or Postal Code - 1

text_image TV ONLINE Identifying Your Location For help press INFO Please enter the 5-digit ZIP Code where your TV is located: 0 1 7 3 0 Next + Back
  • If you selected Canada in Screen 1, you see the Postal Code screen.
  • Input Postal Code by pressing /to scroll through letters (or numbers) and then to move to the next character field.
  • Press → highlight Next.
  • Press ENTER to display Screen 3.

Screen 3: Select service(s)

  • Press ⬆ to highlight the connected video source(s) for which you would like to receive show listings.
  • Press ENTER to make your selection(s).
  • Press → highlight Next.
  • Press ENTER to go to Screen 4.

Note

- If you do not have cable service, you must select Antenna in order to receive a channel lineup and listings.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

text_image TV GUIDE Selecting your services For help press INFO Please select which service(s) you would like your TV Guide On Screen™ to support (check all that apply): Antenna ✓ Cable without a Cable Box Next + Back

Screen 4: Which input terminal is the system plugged into?

- Select "ANT/CABLE A IN" or "ANT B IN" and you see Screen 5.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Screen 4: Which input terminal is the system plugged into? - 1

text_image TV GAMES Configuring for cable For help press INFO Please select on which input(s) you have connected your cable. Check all that apply (inputs that can collect TV Guide On Screen information are marked with an asterisk): ✓ ANT/CABLE A IN* ANT B IN* Next Back

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Screen 4: Which input terminal is the system plugged into? - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Screen 4: Which input terminal is the system plugged into? - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Screen 4: Which input terminal is the system plugged into? - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Screen 4: Which input terminal is the system plugged into? - 5

PDP5080HD.book Page 35 Monday, April 9, 2007 7:49 PM

TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup

07

Screen 5: Are the settings correct?

  • If you select "Yes", you see Screen 6.
  • If you select "No", you see Screen 1.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Screen 5: Are the settings correct? - 1

text_image TV GUIDE Check Your Settings You have entered the following TV Guide On Screen system settings. If any setting is marked INCOMPLETE, you will not be able to use that feature until you complete that portion of TV Guide On Screen system setup. ZIP Code — 61730 (USA) Cable on "ANTICABLE A IN" Are the above settings correct? ✓ Yes, continue setup process No, repeat setup process Next > + Back

Screen 6: Congratulations

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Screen 6: Congratulations - 1

text_image TV GUIDE Helpful Information Congratulations on your TV Guide On Screen setup! Within 24 hours after your TV is powered OFF, you should begin to get listings. Press TV GUIDE on your remote: • If listings are not yet available, you'll use a TV Guide Setup Progress Screen. • If listings are available, you'll see a listings grid. (Note: It may take up to 6 days to get the full 8 days of listings.) To make sure you get the latest daily listings updates, remember: • TV = OFF And don't forget to update your TV Guide On Screen Setup if you: • move to a new ZIP Code: • change a service: • add or remove a device Just press TV GUIDE and choose the "Change system settings" option. More information is available at www.tryco.com. Next + Back

The HOME MENU

Chapter 8

The HOME MENU

HOME MENU overview
For AV source

HOME MENU Item Page
Picture AV Selection 54
Contrast 55
Brightness 55
Color 55
Tint 55
Sharpness 55
Pro Adjust55
Reset55
SoundTreble57
Bass57
Balance57
Roset57
Sound Effect58
Power ControlEnergy Save58
No Signal off58
No Operation off59
Sleep Timer——59
Option Position60
Auto Size62
Side Mask62
HDMI Input65
HDMI Control Setting76
Blue LED Dimmer63
Orbiter63
Video Pattern63
Digital Audio Out68
Language63
Tuner NR Setting61
Game Control Pre*61
Room Light Sensor63
Tuner SetupChannel Setup37
Parental Control38-42
Favorites43
Closed Captions43-44
Clock44
Home Gallery——70-73
HDMI Control——74

For PC source

HOME MENU Item Page
Picture AV Selection 54
Contrast 56
Brightness 55
Rod55
Green55
Blue55
Reset55
SoundSame as the AV source57
Power ControlEnergy Save58
Power Management59
Sleep Timer——59
Option Auto Setup60
Manual Setup60
HDMI Input65
HDMI Control Selling76
Home Gallery——70 - 73
HDMI Control——74

Using the HOME MENU

The following describes the typical procedure for setting up the menus. For the actual procedures, see the appropriate pages that describe individual functions.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Using the HOME MENU - 1

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Press / ♦ to ♦ elect a menu item, and then press ENTER.
3 Repeat step 2 until you access the desired submenu item.

  • The number of menu layers differs depending on the menu items.
  • If you select "Tuner Setup", a menu bar appears at the bottom of the screen. To select a submenu item on the bar, pr←s / i←s stead of /.

4 Press ←/→ to select an option (or parameter), and then press ENTER.

For some menu items, press ↗ instead of /. ← →

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Using the HOME MENU - 2

Note

- You can return to the upper menu levels by pressing RETURN.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

Tuner Setup

Chapter 9

Tuner Setup

Setting up TV channels

This section describes how to search and set up TV channels that you can watch under the current conditions. Unless you set up TV channels using Auto Channel Preset, you may not be able to tune in those channels.

Using Auto Channel Preset

Auto Channel Preset automatically searches and sets up TV channels.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Channel Setup" (/ ◆ then ENTER).
4 Select "Ant. A" or "Ant. B" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select "Auto Channel Preset" (/ then ENTER).
6 Select "Air" or "Cable" (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Using Auto Channel Preset - 1

text_image Channel Setup Ant. A Auto Ch. Reset Cable Ant. A Auto Chance Preset Air Cable 2.0 4.0 6.0 Enter Begin Preset Cancel Home Menu Exit
  • Channel search automatically starts.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Using Auto Channel Preset - 2

text_image Channel Setup Ant: A Auto Ch Press Ant: A Auto Channel Press • Cable One Moment Please ... Cancel Home Menu Edit

• To quit Auto Channel Preset halfway, press D.

7 After Auto Channel Preset has been finished, press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Using Auto Channel Preset - 3

Note

  • When using the Cable Converter, you may need to manually add Cable Converter output channels.
  • When an inserted CableCARD™ is functioning, you can execute Auto Channel Preset by selecting "Ant.B" in step 4.

Setting for skipping unwanted channels

From among TV channels searched and set up using Auto Channel Preset, you can select channels to be skipped when CH+/- are operated.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Channel Setup" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Ant. A" or "Ant. B" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select "Channel Keep/Skip" (/ then ENTER).

6 Select a channel to be skipped (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting for skipping unwanted channels - 1

text_image Channel Setup Arc. A Channel Keep/Skip Arc. A Channel Keep/Skip 2.0 4.0 6.0 Home Menu: Exit
  • For the skipped channel, a check mark disappears.

7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting for skipping unwanted channels - 2

Note

  • To restore skipped channels, use the above procedure except that you select a skipped channel in step 6.
  • When using the Cable Converter, you may need to manually add Cable Converter output channels.

Setting up TV channels manually

This section describes how to manually set up TV channels that have not been set up by Auto Channel Preset.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Channel Setup" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Ant. A" or "Ant. B" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select "Add Channel" (/ʌthn ENTER).
6 Select a channel number to be added (/ then ENTER).

  • You can also use buttons 0 to 9 to enter a channel number.
    PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting up TV channels manually - 1
text_image Add Channel Setup Arc. A Add Channels A/C. A Add Channel 000 1 Home Menu Ext

• After ENTER has been pressed, a confirmation screen appears.

7 Press A to complete the setup process.
8 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting up TV channels manually - 2

Note

- Adding channels manually is for adding analog channels only. Digital channels cannot be added.

Checking signal strength

When you have selected antenna A, you can check the current channel's signal strength. You may use this function when receiving a channel through a VHF/UHF antenna.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Channel Setup" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Ant. A" (/ then ENTER).

Tuner Setup

5 Select "Signal Strength" (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Select "Signal Strength" (/ then ENTER). - 1

text_image Channel Setup Art. A Signal Strength Art. A Signal Strength Maximum: 100 Current: 100 Home Menu Ext

- Adjust the direction of the antenna so that the current signal strength reaches as close to the maximum signal strength as possible.

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. - 1

Note

  • This function is available only when receiving digital broadcasting signals over air.
  • When you use the TV Guide On Screen™ system with a cable service, select "Cable" for "Auto Channel Preset".
  • Executing more than one scan for cables will result in broadcasting reception failures.

Checking the CableCARD™ ID

The plasma display has a slot for a CableCARD™ that is used for managing your information by the cable TV company. You will locate the CableCARD™ slot on the rear of the plasma display. The following procedure allows you to check your CableCARD™ ID and the Host ID.

1 Press HOME MENU.

2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ ♠ then ENTER).

3 Select "Channel Setup" (/ then ENTER).

4 Select "POD ID" (/)

- The Host ID and CableCARD ^® ID appear.

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Parental Control

With the Parental Control, parents can prevent their children from watching inappropriate TV programs. VCR or DVD contents. When an attempt is made to watch a program (or content) blocked by parents, the plasma display shows nothing but a message. The Parental Control functions for both conventional and digital TV channels.

In the U.S. three rating systems have been provided: the TV ratings, TV Parental Guidelines, and movie ratings. Movie ratings are provided by the Motion Picture Association of America (MPAA) and are used for original movies not edited for television. For the rating system in Canada, see page 40.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Parental Control - 1

Note

  • In the U.S. TV Parental Guideline Rating System, programs with a rating of "None" may be blocked on this product. Examples of programs with a "None" rating include:
    • Emergency Bulletins (such as EAS messages, weather warning and others)
  • Locally originated programming
  • News
  • Political
    • Public Service Announcements
  • Religious
  • Sports
  • Weather

Voluntary movie rating system (MPAA)

Rating Description

Age-BaseN/A Not applicable for MPAA ratings
G General audiences. All ages admitted.
PG Parental guidance suggested. Some material may not be suitable for children.
PG-13 Parents strongly cautioned. Some material may be inappropriate for children under 13.
R Restricted. Under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult guardian (age varies in some jurisdictions).
NC-17 No one 17 and under admitted.
NR Not rated.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Voluntary movie rating system (MPAA) - 1

Note

- The voluntary movie rating system only uses an age-based rating.

TV ratings

Rating Description
Age-BaseTV-Y All children
TV-Y7 Children seven and above
TV-G General audiences
TV-PG Parental guidance suggested
TV-14 Parents strongly cautioned
TV-MA Mature audiences only

PIONEER PDP5080HD - TV ratings - 1

Note

- The system also allows you to select "None", which blocks programs with a rating of "None". For the examples of such programs, see "Note" on the left column on this page.

Changing the password

Using a password prevents other persons from changing Parental Control settings. A default password (1234) has been set before shipment. Use the following procedure to change the password.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ ♦h♦n ENTER).
3 Select "Parental Control" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Password" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select "Change Password" (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the password - 1

text_image Password Change Password Clear Password Password Home Menu Ext

6 Enter the current four-digit password, using buttons 0 to 9.
7 Enter a four-digit password to be newly set, using buttons 0 to 9.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the password - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the password - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the password - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the password - 5

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the password - 6

Tuner Setup

8 Enter the same password that you have entered in step 7.

• A confirmation screen appears.

9 Press A.

10 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Tuner Setup - 1

Note

• Take note of the newly set password and keep it handy.

Clearing the password

Use the following procedure to clear the password.

1 Press HOME MENU.

2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).

3 Select "Parental Control" (/ then ENTER).

4 Select "Password" (/ then ENTER).

5 Select "Clear Password" (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Clearing the password - 1

text_image Parental Control Password Password Chrome Password Clear Password Home Menu Ext

6 Enter the current four-digit password, using buttons 0 to 9.

• A confirmation screen appears.

7 Press A.

8 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Clearing the password - 2

Note

• The above procedure will reset the password to the factory default (1234).

Activating the Parental Control

1 Press HOME MENU.

2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).

3 Select "Parental Control" (/ then ENTER).

4 Select "Status" (/ then ENTER).

5 Select "On" (/ then ENTER).

- The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit password using buttons 0 to 9.

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Setting the voluntary movie rating system (MPAA)

1 Press HOME MENU.

2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).

3 Select "Parental Control" (/ then ENTER).

4 Select "MPAA Ratings" (/ then ENTER).

5 Select the desired rating and change the setting ( / then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting the voluntary movie rating system (MPAA) - 1

text_image Parental Control MPAA Ratings MPAA Ratings N/A RGB PG Booked MPAA Ratings N/A, 0, PC, PS-13, 6, NC-7 Home Menu Ext
  • The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit password using buttons 0 to 9.
    • Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.
  • A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.
  • All the ratings have been unblocked before shipment.

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting the voluntary movie rating system (MPAA) - 2

Note

- Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.

Setting the TV ratings

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Parental Control" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "TV Ratings" (/ʌhən ENTER).
5 Select the desired rating and change the setting ( / then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting the TV ratings - 1

text_image Parental Control TV Ratings TV-Home TV-Y TV-Y7 TV-S TV-PG Blocked TV Ratings Home Menu Ext
  • The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit password using buttons 0 to 9.
    • Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.
  • A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.
  • All the ratings have been unblocked before shipment.

We suggest you write down your password so you don't forget it.

PDP-5080HD/PDP-4280HD

Your password No.:

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting the TV ratings - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting the TV ratings - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting the TV ratings - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting the TV ratings - 5

If you forget the password

When the message "Enter your Password" is displayed in step 6 under "Clearing the password", press the ENTER button on the remote control unit and hold it down for three seconds or longer. The password reverts to "1234".

Tuner Setup

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Tuner Setup - 1

Note

- Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.

Setting the TV Parental Guidelines (TV Guidelines)

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Parental Control" (/ ◀ then ENTER).
4 Select "TV Parental Guidelines" (/ʌhən ENTER).
5 Select the desired rating and change the setting (/ ↑ ↓ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting the TV Parental Guidelines (TV Guidelines) - 1

text_image Parental Control TV Parental Guidelines TV Parental Guidelines Fantasy Violence Violence Sexual Situations Boxed TV Parental Guidelines Home Menu Ext
  • The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit password using buttons 0 to 9.
    • Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.
  • A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.
  • All the ratings have been unblocked before shipment.

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Blocking Not Rated TV programs

Use the following procedure to block TV programs whose rating information is unavailable.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ʌhən ENTER).
3 Select "Parental Control" (/◆n ENTER).
4 Select "Unavailable Ratings" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select "Block" or "Don't Block" (/ʌhən ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Blocking Not Rated TV programs - 1

text_image Parental Control Unavailable Ratings Unavailable Ratings # - Back Don't Back Home Menu Exit
  • The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit password using buttons 0 to 9.
  • The factory default is "Don't Block".

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Canadian rating systems

In Canada you can choose the Canadian English ratings or the Canadian French ratings. These ratings are based on the Canadian Radio-Television and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) policy.

Canadian English ratings

Rating Description

Age-BaseE Exempt: Includes news, sports, documentaries and other information programming; talk shows, music videos, and variety programming.
C Children: Intended for younger children under the age of eight years. Pays careful attention to themes that could threaten their sense of security and well-being.
C8+ Children over eight years old: Contains no portrayal of violence as the preferred, acceptable, or only way to resolve conflict; nor encourages children to imitate dangerous acts which they may see on the screen.
G General: Considered acceptable for all age groups. Appropriate viewing for the entire family, contains very little violence, physical, verbal or emotional.
PG Parental Guidance: Intended for a general audience, but may not be suitable for younger children (under the age of eight) because it could contain controversial themes or issues.
14+ Over 14 Years: Could contain themes where violence is one of the dominant elements of the storyline, but it must be integral to the development of plot or character. Language usage could be profane and nudity present within the context of the theme.
18+ Adults: Intended for viewers 18 years and older and might contain depictions of violence, which while related to the development of plot, character or themes, are intended for adult viewing. Could contain graphic language and portrayals of sex and nudity.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Canadian English ratings - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Canadian English ratings - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Canadian English ratings - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Canadian English ratings - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Canadian English ratings - 5

Tuner Setup

Canadian French ratings

Rating Description
Age-BaseE Exempt programming.
G General: All ages and children, contains minimal direct violence, but may be integrated into the plot in a humorous or unrealistic manner.
8ans+ General but inadvisable for young children: May be viewed by a wide public audience, but could contain scenes disturbing to children under eight who cannot distinguish between imaginary and real situations. Recommended for viewing with parent.
13ans+ Over 13 years: Could contain scenes of frequent violent scenes and therefore recommended for viewing with parent.
16ans+ Over 16 years: Could contain frequent violent scenes and intense violence.
18ans+ Over 18 years: Only for adult viewing. Could contain frequent violent scenes and extreme violence.

Setting Canadian English ratings

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Parental Control" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Canadian English Ratings" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select the desired rating and change the setting (/ ↑ ↓ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting Canadian English ratings - 1

text_image Parental Control Convular English Ratings Convular English Ratings + E C C6+ Blocked Convular English Ratings Home Menu Ext
  • The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit password using buttons 0 to 9.
    • Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.
  • A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.
  • All the ratings have been unblocked before shipment.

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. - 1

Note

- Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.

Setting Canadian French ratings

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Parental Control" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Canadian French Ratings" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select the desired rating and change the setting ( / then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting Canadian French ratings - 1

text_image Parental Control Caucasian French Ratings Caucasian French Ratings E: .5 $ ans+ Checked CaudanFrench Ratings E: $ time, 10 ms, 11 min, 12 8s+ Home Menu Edit
  • The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit password using buttons 0 to 9.
    • Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.
  • A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.
  • All the ratings have been unblocked before shipment.

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. - 1

Note

- Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.

Setting new ratings

Digital broadcasts are now carrying new ratings that are not compatible with the plasma display's original Parental Control settings. When you first tune in one of these broadcasts, a New Parental Control menu appears on the screen. This tells you that you must now change your Parental Control settings to handle these new ratings. Otherwise, ratings you had previously blocked may become unblocked.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Parental Control" (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting new ratings - 1

text_image Parental Control Status Status MPAA Ratings TV Ratings New XXXXXXXXXXXX Home Menu Ext

- The new menu is displayed when Status is selected and the message "Regional ratings have changed. Set Parental Control ratings again." appears on the right of the screen.

Tuner Setup

4 Select the desired rating and change the setting (/ ↑ ↓ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Tuner Setup - 1

text_image Parental Control Unavailable Ratings New (oo) New (oo) New (oo) Password Home Menu Edit
  • The menu is added between "Unavailable Ratings" and "Password".
  • The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit password using buttons 0 to 9.
    • Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.
  • A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.
  • When you are finished, the word "New" disappears from the Parental Control menu.

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Deleting new ratings

You can delete a New Parental Control menu. When deleted, the past blocking settings you had entered are also cleared and removed from the menu.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ʌhən ENTER).
3 Select "Parental Control" (/ ◆h◆n ENTER).
4 Select "Status" and then "Off" (/ʌn ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Deleting new ratings - 1

text_image Parental Control Status Status Off Enter star Password C:\Case Entry C:\Cancel Home Menu Left

- The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit password using buttons 0 to 9.

5 Select A for "Accept" or D for "Cancel".

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Deleting new ratings - 2

text_image Parental Control Status Off Reset Digital Replace strings? OKcept Cancel Home Menu Exit

- The New Parental Control menu remains, however, when the selection screen for deleting new ratings disappears in approximately 60 seconds after no settings are entered.

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Deleting new ratings - 3

Note

  • While the Parental Control menu is opened, the status display remains unchanged even if the system had received broadcasts carrying new ratings.
  • Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.

Temporarily deactivating the Parental Control

When the Parental Control is working and senses a blocked TV program (or content), the plasma display shows nothing but a message.

The method for temporarily deactivating the Parental Control differs, depending on the currently selected input source.

Antenna A or antenna B:

The following screen appears. Press ENTER

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Antenna A or antenna B: - 1

text_image Parental Control WWWWWW XXXXXXXXXX 1000.0000 XXXXXXXXXX (Ant. B) XXXXXXXXXX Enter Disable Parental Control

Enter your four-digit password.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Antenna A or antenna B: - 2

- The password entry screen stays only for one minute. After the screen disappears, pressing ENTER causes it to appear again.

Input 1 to Input 3:

Enter your four-digit password. You need not press ENTER first; pressing ENTER causes the password entry screen to disappear.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Input 1 to Input 3: - 1

text_image Please Input Your Password.
  • The above password entry screen will also be shown during 2-screen, picture-in-picture, and while freezing an image.
  • The password entry screen stays only for one minute. After the screen disappears, pressing ENTER causes it to appear again.
  • A password entry screen is displayed if you select "Block" in "Unavailable Ratings" for INPUT 4 to INPUT 7.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Input 1 to Input 3: - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Input 1 to Input 3: - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Input 1 to Input 3: - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Input 1 to Input 3: - 5

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Input 1 to Input 3: - 6

Tuner Setup

Setting your favorite channels

Set up to 10 TV channels to each of the four color buttons on the remote control unit (40 channels in total). You can then quickly select from only your favorite channels.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Favorites" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select a color button (A, B, C, D) (/ then ENTER).
5 Select a TV channel to be registered (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Setting your favorite channels - 1

text_image Favorites Favorite A 3 8.3 4 9.0 5 9.0 6 9.0 7 11.0 8 11.0 Current Favorites A Line Up 8008.000 ADD11.000 ADD08.000 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Home Menul Ext
  • A star appears beside the favorite channels currently selected.
  • To register another TV channel under the same color button, repeat step 5. To register another TV channel under a different color button, repeat steps 4 and 5.

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Setting up closed captions

Your plasma display is equipped with an internal closed caption decoder. Closed caption allows you to view conversations, narration, and sound effects in TV programs and home videos as subtitles on your plasma display screen.

You may enjoy digital closed captions when watching digital TV programs. Digital closed captions allow you to change parameters such as fonts and colors.

- Not all programs and videos offer closed caption. Please look for the "C" symbol to ensure that captions will be shown.

Activating the closed caption

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Closed Captions" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Status" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select "On" or "On If Mute" (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Activating the closed caption - 1

text_image Closed Options Status Off On On All Mutc Home Menu Ext

Item Description

Off (default)Does not show closed captions

On Always shows closed captions
On If Mute Shows closed captions only while sound is being muted

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Selecting the type of conventional closed captions

Select the type of conventional closed captions that you will watch after tuning to a conventional TV channel. This selection also becomes effective when a selected digital TV program provides only conventional closed captions.

  • "CC 1", "CC 2", "CC 3", or "CC 4" displays subtitles of TV dramas and news programs while allowing a full view of the picture.
  • "Text 1", "Text 2", "Text 3", or "Text 4" superimposes on the picture other information (e.g. TV guide, weather) that is independent of the TV program in progress.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Closed Captions" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Analog Settings" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select the desired closed caption (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Selecting the type of conventional closed captions - 1

text_image Closed Captions Analog Settings CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 Text 1 Home Menu Ext

• The factory default is "CC 1".

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Selecting digital closed captions

Use the following procedure to select digital closed captions: Service 1 to 6.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ ♠hon ENTER).
3 Select "Closed Captions" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Digital Settings" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select "Digital Service" (/ then ENTER).
6 Select the desired closed caption (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Selecting digital closed captions - 1

text_image Closed Captions Digital Settings Digital Settings Service 1 Service 2 Service 3 Service 4 Service 5 Home Menu Ext

• The factory default is "Service 1".

7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Tuner Setup

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Tuner Setup - 1

Note

- The Primary Caption Service is usually offered for Service 1, and the Secondary Language Service is usually offered for Service 2 if these services are available.

Selecting digital closed caption parameters

Use the following procedure to change such parameters of digital closed captions as font size, font type, foreground and background colors.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Closed Captions" (/ ◀ then ENTER).
4 Select "Digital Settings" (/ʌhən ENTER).
5 Select "Font Size", "Font", or any other item (↑/↓ then ENTER).
6 Select the desired parameter (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Selecting digital closed caption parameters - 1

text_image Closed Capsets Digital Settings Font Size Large Standard Small Digital Settings Font Size Home Menu Ext

7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 as necessary (, ←).↑ ↓

8 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

The following table shows the parameters selectable for each item.

Item Selection
Font Size Auto/ Large/ Standard/ Small

Font1Auto/ Font 1/ Font 2/ Font 3/ Font 4/ Font 5/ Font 6/ Font 7

Font Color Auto/ Black/ White/ Red/ Green/ Blue/ Yellow/ Magenta/ Cyan

Font Opacity Auto/ Solid/ Transparent/ Translucent/Flashing
Background ColorAuto/ Black/ White/ Red/ Green/ Blue/ Yellow/Magenta/ Cyan

Background Auto/ Solid/ Transparent/ Translucent Opacity
^1 Font 1 (monospaced with serifs)/ Font 2 (proportionally spaced with serifs)/ Font 3 (monospaced without serifs)/ Font 4 (proportionally spaced without serifs)/ Font 5 (casual font); Font 6 (cursive font)/ Font. 7 (small capital's font)

With "Auto" selected, parameters specified by the provider are used; if not specified by the provider, the bolded default parameters are used. If you select parameters other than "Auto", the selected parameters are used regardless of the provider's specifications.

Clock Setting

With "Auto Set" selected for Clock Setting, the system acquires and sets time information automatically. You can also manually set the correct time. If you disconnect the power cord from the power outlet or power blackout occurs, the set time is cleared.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Tuner Setup" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Clock" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Time Zone" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select a time zone for your area (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Clock Setting - 1

text_image Cocos Time Zone Atlantic Eastern Central Mountain Current Time: 9.55 pm EDT Monday 05/17/04 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Home Menu Exit

6 Select "D.S.T." (, ←, then ENTER).

7 Select "Applies" or "Does Not Apply" (/ then ENTER).

- When you start "Daylight Savings Time" mode, select "Applies" for "D.S.T." and select "Does Not Apply" when you cancel it, otherwise the correct time will not be displayed regardless of the "Auto/Manual Set" setting.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Clock Setting - 2

text_image Clock Daylight Savings Time D.S.T. + Apoles Does Not Apply Current Time: 9.56 pm EDT Monday 05/17/04 Home Menu Edit

8 Select "Auto/Manual Set" (, ←, then ENTER).
9 Select "Auto Set" or "Manual Set" (/ then ENTER).
10 If you select "Auto Set", select an antenna (A or B) and a channel number using ↑ and ENTER.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Clock Setting - 3

text_image Cycles Auto-Manual Set Cycles Set Channel Auto-Manual Set • Auto Set Ant. A 2.0 Current Time: 11:58 pm FOT Monday 05/17/04 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Home Menu Exit

- The date and time will be automatically corrected using data from the selected channel.

If you select "Manual Set", manually set the date and time u s ↑↓ ↓→ / . / and ENTER.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Clock Setting - 4

text_image Auto-Manual Set Auto-Manual Set Manual Set 3 4 5 6 3.17:04 11:50pm Current Time: 11:58 pm FOT Monday: 05:17:04 Home Menu Exit

11 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Clock Setting - 5

Note

- If you setup the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the plasma display acquires clock information through the TV Guide On Screen™ system; in this situation you cannot set up the clock using the menu. If you select a parameter for the Clock menu and press ENTER, the menu screen disappears and a dialog box appears instead; press A to clear the dialog box.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 4

TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation

Chapter 10

TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation

Using the TV Guide On Screen™ system

Before you can start using the TV Guide On Screen™ system, you'll need to set it up. If you haven't already done this, please turn to TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup on page 33 before proceeding.

In the United States, TV Guide and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. In Canada, TV Guide is a registered mark of Transcontinental, Inc. and is used under license by Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Legal Notices - 1

Note

  • The TV Guide On Screen ^® interactive program guide provides listings for cable-ready and digital cable services as well as over-the-air broadcast. It does not provide listings for satellite services.
  • Once you set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system it may take up to 24 hours to begin to receive TV program listings. Receipt of all eight days of listings may take up to one week.
  • TV Guide may not be available in all areas. As content providers move to digital programming and broadcasting, TV Guide data may be unavailable or become unavailable.

Screen components

Many of the screens have common elements to make using the system easier.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Screen components - 1

text_image 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CSC: Crime Scene Investigation "Daddy's Little Girl" (Drama) A professional motocross rainer is rubbed to clark while working on his bike in a garage attached to a house he shared with two women he recently met. The investigation reveals that the victim was about to leave them with the younger of the two women. Director: Terrence, Phases, TV14 (Violence), Seoul/Situation (N) today 5:0PM 8:30PM 1:00PM CBS: Shared Balance Question of God American Investor Citi: Crime Scene Fox: True/True Story American Investor FOX: True/True Story True O.C. Play: Play O.C. TV & Grace: My Goodnight Grace Will & Grace SpongeBob Monet Full House News Playoff To Be Announced

11 Channel logo & number – Identifies network and channel number
12 Info Box – Shows information about the highlighted item.
13 Highlight – Indicates an active file, from which you can set reminder, display a menu, etc.

TV Guide On Screen™ icons

Various icons are used to convey information or show the status of an item. You will locate these icons on the Info Bar, inside the Info Box, or beside program titles.

  • Info icon – Additional information is available; press the INFO button to display.
    • Progress Bar – Shows the elapsed time of the current program.
    HDTV – Indicates that a program is a high-definition broadcast.
  • New – The program is new (not a repeat).
  • stereo – The program is broadcast in stereo.
    • The program is broadcast with closed captioning.
    • TV Rating – Indicates the age rating for the program.
    • Remind Once – One-time only reminder
  • Remind Daily – Reminds for the same channel and time every Monday through Friday (manual reminder only).
  • Remind Regularly – Reminds the same program any day it airs on the same channel at the same time.
  • Remind Weekly – Reminds every week at the same time/day.
  • Remind Off – The program remains in the SCHEDULE list, but will not remind until the frequency is changed to one of the above.

1 TV GUIDE logo
2 C l o c k - Shows the current time.
3 Time slot - Half-hour time slots are displayed horizontally.
4 Time tab – Indicates the currently selected time slot.
5 Current service label – Indicates the currently selected service.
6 Service bar – Gives access to the various services of the Guide.
7 Title tile – Shows the title of the TV program.
8 Info Bar – Shows various icons to convey information or show the status of an item.
9 Video window – Allows you to continue watching the current program while using the Guide or to view the program selected in the listings.
10 Panel ads and panel menu entry – Space for show or product advertising (and the panel menu).

10

TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation

TV Guide On Screen™ navigation

The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons you'll use to navigate the TV Guide On Screen™ system.

Key What it does

TV GUIDE Press to display the TV Guide On ScreenTM system (also use to exit).
+/↓/←/→Use to navigate screens (highlight an item).
ENTER Press to confirm a selection or execute an action.Can also be used to display the panel menu when a future program is highlighted.
MENU Press to display a panel menu.
INFO Press to cycle through the available information for the current program or screen.
Number buttons Use for numeric entry.
PAGE +/- Press to select the previous/next page of information (where applicable).
DAY +/- Press to jump to the next/previous day of program listings (if applicable).

You can also use the TV GUIDE, ENTER, UP/DOWN, and LEFT/RIGHT buttons on the plasma display. The UP/DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT buttons operate the same as the ♠♦d / ♦️tons on the remote control unit.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - TV Guide On Screen™ navigation - 1

text_image INFO SAT/DVD MENU HOME MENU MENU SAT GUIDE TV GUIDE DVD TOP MENU DAY+ PAGE+ ENTER DAY- HOME CONTROL PAGE- RETURN

The Listings screen

You can consider the Listings screen as the "home" screen of the TV Guide On Screen™ system. This is the screen you see when you press TV GUIDE.

From the Listings screen you can:

• View eight days of program listings.
• Display information about individual programs.
- Select a program to start watching.
- Set a program to remind.
• See a thumbnail display of any channel in the video window.
- Access panel and channel ads.

1 Press TV GUIDE to display the Listings screen.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press TV GUIDE to display the Listings screen. - 1

text_image TV COS: Crime Scene Investigation "Daddy Little Girl" (Drama) A professional monotross show was introduced to show watching on the bike in a garage attached to choose be shared with two women he recently met. The investigation reveals that the video was about to leave town with the younger of the two women, Director: Terrence O'Hara, TV 14 (Violence, Sexual Situations). It is still unsolved TODAY CBS SACED BANZA COS: Crime Scene Investigation COS: Crime Scene Investigation American Investor FOX: THE TOO SHOW FOX: THE TOO SHOW SWE LIFE! WELL & GRACE, SAY GOGNING! GRACE SPOKING SPEAK NARE PAFFY! TO BE SIMOUNGER. Question of God's COS: Crime Scene Investigation COS: Crime Scene Investigation American Investor FOX: THE TOO SHOW FOX: THE TOO SHOW TIME OF TIME TIME OF TIME TIME OF TIME
  • With "LISTINGS" highlighted in the Service bar at the top of the screen, press INFO to display (and then close) Help information.
  • Press TV GUIDE anytime to exit.

2 Press / ↗/ ↘to navigate the Listings screen.

  • With a currently showing program highlighted, press ENTER to start watching.
  • Move right for later time slots:
  • Press PAGE+/- to scroll one vertical screen at a time.
  • Press INFO to display additional information (if available) about the currently selected program.
  • Press DAY+/- to jump to the next/previous day in the listings grid.

Setting program reminders

By setting a program reminder you can have the TV alert you when a program is about to start on another channel. You can set reminders for individual episodes of a program, or every time a program airs.

1 From LISTINGS, SCHEDULE or SEARCH, highlight the program for which you want to set a reminder.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - From LISTINGS, SCHEDULE or SEARCH, highlight the program for which you want to set a reminder. - 1

text_image SCHEDULE SELL SEARCH SET CIT: Crime Some Investigation "Daddy Little Girl" (Drama) A professional movie camera is solved to death while working on a hike in a garage attached to. Who have been a new women's home next. The investigation reveals that the video was about to leave town with the younger of the two women, Director: Terrence O'Hara, TN IV (Police, Sexual Situations) 1/10 still unsolved TODAY CBS FOX PACS CIS: Crime Some Investigation American Investor FOX FOX PAT PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS PACS

2 Press MENU to display the Episode Options menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press MENU to display the Episode Options menu. - 1

text_image CSC/CM/ST S/C/SP/LL 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press MENU to display the Episode Options menu. - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press MENU to display the Episode Options menu. - 3

TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation

3 Highlight "set reminder" and press ENTER.

4 Set the reminder options:

Press highlight a field: press / t change the setting.

  • frequency – select whether to be reminded just Once, Regularly (at the same time on the same channel), or Weekly (every week at the same time/day). There's also an Off option which puts the program in the reminder schedule but no reminder is given (you can set it to remind later).
  • auto tune – choose whether or not the TV should automatically change channels when a reminder is due.
  • when – set when the reminder is displayed (before, on time, or after a program has started).

5 Once all the settings have been made, press ENTER to highlight "schedule reminder", then press ENTER again.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation - 1

text_image TV SCHEDULE STRAW SEARCH TREAT CIS: Crime Scene Investigation "Daddy Little Girl" (Oscar A professional motors) boxer is deleted to deaf while working on the link in a garage attached to a house by showing with two women's men. The investigation reveals that the victims was about to lose towns with the younger of the two women. Director: Terrier Offshore, TV14 Universe, Sexual Struthers 128 TODAY 10:00 PM 10:00 PM 10:00 PM 10:00 PM 10:00 PM 10:00 PM 10:00 PM 10:00 PM 10:00 PM 10:00 PM 10:00 PM 10:00 PM 10:00 PM 10:00 PM 10:00 PM FCAI 1 CIS: Crime Scene Investigation CIS: Crime Scene American Interimor American Interimor Fox 1 The: July Show The: Q.C. Fox 1 The: July Show The: Q.C. Fox 1 The: July Show The: Q.C. Fox & Grace Day: Goodnight Grace Springwood 1 Hello! 1 Mia! Payoutt to be announced

- The reminder is now set (and will appear in SCHEDULE) and the appropriate icon appears on the program tile.

If there is a time conflict with a previously scheduled auto-tune reminder, you will be alerted to this. You can select to set a reminder for the conflicting program, or cancel the reminder. The following screens appear depending on whether it will override a scheduled reminder.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation - 2

text_image REMINDER CONFLICT! Auto-tuning "Law & Order" will override the recording for "Friends". auto-tune anyway remind, no auto-tune don't set this reminder

When scheduled reminder is due (auto-tune is OFF)

Depending on the settings you made, your program reminder will appear on your TV screen around the time the program is scheduled to start. This happens when you have selected "NO" for the auto tune. The reminder will remain on-screen for three minutes before it automatically disappears.

Press ENTER to tune to the highlighted program in the reminder; or highlight "hide reminders" to dismiss the reminder.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation - 3

If more than one reminder is set for the same time, select the program you want by pressing ♦.↓

Depending on the situation, the following screens will appear. In this case, the reminder will remain on-screen for 15 seconds before it automatically disappears.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation - 5

Press A to leave the reminder effective, or D to dismiss the reminder.

When scheduled reminder is due (auto-tune is ON)

If the "auto-lune" setting was set to "yes" in the Remind Options, one of the following screens appears, depending on the situation. The screen will remain for 15 seconds before it automatically disappears.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation - 6

PIONEER PDP5080HD - TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation - 7

Press A to make the Timer Alert screen disappear.

10

TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation

Searching for programs

The Search screen lets you search for programs alphabetically, by category or by keyword. You can also search for HDTV programs.

Searching by category

Here you can search for programs by category, and then by a further sub-category if you want.

1 Select "SEARCH" from the Service bar at the top of the screen.
2 Press to move to the search category bar, then press ✦/→to select a search category.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Searching by category - 1

text_image SCHEDULE LIST NET SEARCH SETUP First shows alphabetically, by categories (Including MDTs) and by keywords A that appears for updated keyword info Move to this to choose search type MOVITS INCOME CHILDREN Wt Outdoor Baseball Bathing Basketball Snoring Boating Sitting Boving Soccer Football Tennis Golf Winping History Other

• Available categories may include:

• Movies
• Sports
•Children
•Educational
- News
•Variety
- Series
•HDTV

3 Press ↓ to move to the search sub-categories and select the sub-category you want.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Searching by category - 2

text_image Press OK for shows matching category, then now #4 to highlight show and press OK to watch if on now or Men for episode options ALPHABETICAL MOVES SPORTS All Action Animation Comedy Documentary Drama Fantasy Horror Musical Mystery Romance Science Fiction War Western Other All

- The sub-categories available depend on the category you chose in the last step.

4 Press ENTER to display a listing of upcoming programs that match the categories you chose.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Searching by category - 3

text_image SCHEDULE NOTIONS CHANGE BUY Legal Matters Wednesday 2000 or FLN That's So Raven "If Only had a job" Raven tries to make attempts to her dad for getting him first. Raven, TVG, n° MONDAY SELLER EDUCATIONAL CHILDREN ALL Double Date 2000 That's So Raven Fri 13am Tomorrow Fri 150m Super Rabbit Monkey Team Performance Fri 130m Double Date 2000 Fri 13am Back Fri 200m WATCH Fri 190m Finders Kpany Fri 200m

5 Highlight a program listing and press MENU to display the Episode Options panel menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Searching by category - 4

text_image AVOCAT SCHEDULES LISTINGS MACHINE VIEW MOVES ACTION AVOCAT SPORTS Armagedon (Action 1996) ★ A massive android is on accolition course with Earth. Director: Michael Bay, PG13 (Adult Themes, Strong Language, Violence) 4.88 ARMAMENTAL AVOCAT SPORTS AVOCAT ARMAGEDON Thru 1000pm Thunderbird Thru 1500pm Mount Gangs Thru 1000pm Under Ridge 2: Dark Territory Fri 1000pm On the Star Fri 1000pm Deliance Fri 1000pm On Deadly Ground Fri 1000pm

- If the program listing is a program now being broadcast you can press ENTER to start watching it immediately.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Searching by category - 5

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Searching by category - 6

TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation

Searching by keyword

Here you search for shows based on keywords you enter. The keywords you create are stored so you can use them again in the future.

1 Select "SEARCH" from the Service bar at the top of the screen.
2 Press to move to the search category bar, then press ✦/★to select "KEYWORD".

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Searching by keyword - 1

text_image Find shows, actors, direction and descriptions based on a word you enter Press OK to start a new search/ or move + to choose an existing keyword HOTY KEYWORK ALPHARCTICAL Sundays Dot and The New World
  • If you already entered any keywords, they are displayed. Just select one if you want to search for it again.
  • To edit or delete one of the displayed keywords, highlight it and then press MENU. From the panel menu you can choose "edit search" or "delete search".

3 Press ENTER to display the Keyword Search menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Searching by keyword - 2

text_image Find shows actors, directors and descriptions based on a word you enter from OK to start a new search or now ▲ to choose an existing keyword

4 Select "new search".
5 If you want to change the category, move up and select the category you want.

- To search using only the keyword, leave the category set to "All".

- If you select a category ("HDTV", for example) then you'll only see programs in that category that also match the keyword.

6 Highlight "enter keyword" and press ENTER.

7 Input the keyword for the search.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Searching by keyword - 3

text_image Find shows, actors, directors and descriptions based on a word you enter From OK to start a new search or move + to choose an existing keyword
  • Highlight characters by pressing ♠/♦ the pressing ENTER to input them.
  • The keyword you input is stored so that you can use it again whenever you need it.

8 Select "DONE" to start the search.

9 Highlight a program listing, then press MENU to display the Episode Options panel menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Searching by keyword - 4

text_image Big Comedy 1985 ★★★★ A look wish to be an adult is granted by a mechanical wizard at a carnival. Director, Perry Marshall. TV 14 Sexual Situations, Strong Language, Koggative Dialogue! (E) Movie BIG Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Big Movie Show Big Black Comedy Show Big Black All-Star Challenge Big Black All-Black

- If the program listing is a program now being broadcast you can press ENTER to start watching it immediately.

This search is designed to display all programs that start with a particular letter.

1 Select "SEARCH" from the Service bar at the top of the screen.
2 Press ↓ to move to the search category bar, then press ←/→to select "ALPHABETICAL".

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Alphabetical search - 1

text_image SCHEDULE IMPORTS SMRAGE STUP move to choose a letter for your search still unsolved KEYWORD PARMASTOCK MOVIES Premiere's Tight 10/07 - 12.0 M A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

10

TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation

3 Press ENTER.
4 Select a letter, then press ENTER to display all programs starting with that letter.
5 Highlight a program listing and press MENU to display the Episode Options panel menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation - 1

text_image AMRAGEDITION (Action 1998) ★ A massive asteroid is on a collection course with Earth. Director: Michael Bay, PG 13 (Adult Themes, Strong Language, Vielerola) [68] AMOUNTICAL AVANTOS SPORTS MOVATL ACTION 1000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Armagedition Thrimal Main Guard Super Stage 1: Dark Territory On the Artist Def Vancer Def Deadly Ground

- If the program listing is a program now being broadcast you can press ENTER to start watching it immediately.

The search Episode Options menu

From the Episode Options menu you can select:

  • go to Service bar – closes the panel menu and returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen.
  • tune to channel / watch now – exits the TV Guide On Screen™ guide and tunes to the channel.
  • set reminder – goes to the Remind Options menu.
  • cancel – closes the panel menu and returns to the highlighted program listing.
  • The ↑ buttons move the highlight between options in the panel menu. Use the number buttons to input information.
  • If a highlighted field has arrows on either side, press cycle through the options.
  • Press ENTER on any option to highlight the default command (e.g., Done), then press ENTER again to execute and close the panel menu.
  • Select Cancel and press ENTER to close the panel menu and return to the previous screen, or press MENU to cancel any changes and close the menu.

Scheduling reminders

From the Schedule area you can review, edit or delete reminders.

1 Select "SCHEDULE" from the Service bar at the top of the screen.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Scheduling reminders - 1

text_image shows for behind are listed here Move + to access To Go and pass Menus for options Sliced Balance: Thu 5/18 8:30pm Blue Stream: Thu 5/18 15:30pm SportsCenter: Fri 5/19 10:00pm Movie Racing: Fri 5/19 5:30pm

A list of programs that have remind events scheduled appears. The icons on the right side indicate the status of the events.

  • Once only reminder
    • Daily Reminds for the same channel and time every Monday through Friday (manual reminder only)
  • Regularly – Reminds the same program any day it airs on the same channel at the same time ^1 .
    • Weekly reminder (every week at the same time/day)
    • Off: The program remains in the SCHEDULE list, but will not remind until the frequency is changed to one of the above.

1 The reminder will still appear if the program starts any time up to the midway point of the original schedule. For example, up to 9:15 for a 9:00 to 9:30 program.

2 Highlight a program in the list and press MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Scheduling reminders - 2

text_image TV GOLD 12:00 SCHEDULE STOCK R.QTY HOTEN STARTER HOME RACING 5/30/00 Friday 5/19 5:00pm TX Sacred Location 1 Hour 3:15 4:00pm TX Play History Friday 6:18 10:00pm TX

- When you highlight a program in the list you'll see information related to that program appear in the Info Box.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Scheduling reminders - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Scheduling reminders - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Scheduling reminders - 5

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Scheduling reminders - 6

TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation

Using the reminder To Do list

The To Do screen lists scheduled events with an icon that identifies the event type. From the To Do screen you can review, edit, or delete reminder events that you previously set. You can sort the scheduled events by date, title, or event type. You can also schedule a manual reminder.

The Schedule Optios menu

The Schedule Options menu is accessible by pressing MENU when either "SCHEDULE" is highlighted in the Service bar, or a program is highlighted.

When "SCHEDULE" is highlighted in the service bar:

  • go to Service Bar – closes the panel menu and returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen.
  • sort by – select a sort order for the program listings.
  • new manual reminder – select and then fill in all the necessary fields to set the reminder. Select "schedule reminder" when you're done to save and exit, or select "cancel" to exit without saving.
  • done – closes the panel menu and returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen.
  • cancel – closes the panel menu without saving any changes and returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen.

When a program is highlighted:

  • go to Service Bar – closes the panel menu and returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen.
  • watch now – start watching the selected program (this option is "tune to channel" for a program that isn't showing now).
  • cancel – closes the panel menu and returns to the highlighted program listing.

For reminder:

  • delete reminder – remove the reminder from the schedule (requires confirmation).
  • edit reminder – edit the reminder settings (opens the Remind Options menu).

Changing setup options

You can change TV Guide On Screen™ settings from the Setup menu. Setup options are divided into three categories: system settings, channel display, default options, and display setup progress.

1 Select "SETUP" from the Service bar at the top of the screen.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Select "SETUP" from the Service bar at the top of the screen. - 1

text_image Customize your settings, defaults and Channel Linkups – and Check Listups updates Just move 4 to highlight your choice, or press Menu to change Video Window status SETUP Change system settings Change channel display Change default option Display setup program

Changing the system settings

The system settings include your ZIP/postal code and your cable TV setup.

1 Highlight the "Change system settings" item.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Highlight the "Change system settings" item. - 1

text_image Press Ok to view or update any info entered during this Guide setup, or to select a different channel lineup. SETUP Change system settings Change channel display Change default options Display setup progress Sundays B# on The World Network

As you highlight an option you can see the settings you can adjust in that area:

  • System settings – ZIP/postal code, cable setup, etc.
  • Channel display – Channel position, tuning channel, display on/off, etc.
  • Default options – General and reminder defaults
  • Display setup progress – Status of various Guide setup functions

10

TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation

2 Press ENTER to display the current settings and the options to change them.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation - 1

text_image You have entered the following TV Guide On Screen system settings. If any setting is marked INCOMPLETE, you will not be able to use that feature until you complete that portion of TV Guide On Screen system setup. 2M Code — CYTSO USA. Cable on "AMTCABLE 5 IN" Are the above settings correct? Yes, everything is correct Yes, but my channel lineup is incorrect No, repeat setup process

3 Select one of the options, then follow the on-screen instructions.

  • Yes, everything is correct: displays a helpful information screen. Press ENTER to quit the TV Guide On Screen™.
  • Yes, but my channel lineup is incorrect: displays a screen from which you may choose the correct channel lineup. Press ENTER to display the Channel Editor screen.
  • No. repeat setup process: displays screen 1 shown on page 34.

Changing the channel display settings

From the channel display settings you can set/change:

  • the display setting to always display (On), never display (Off), or display only when channel information is available (Auto Hide).
    • the tuned channel number.
    • the channel position in the channel listing.

1 Highlight the "Change channel display" item.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the channel display settings - 1

text_image Press OK to access Channel Editor, then change an option directly on screen or press Menu to access all options. STOP Change screen settings Change channel display Change default options Disney sense progress

2 Press ENTER to display the channel editor.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the channel display settings - 2

text_image Press OK to set this channel to on off, or auto-hide, or press Menu for more options. Legal Matters Wednesday 2000 at TLM CHANNEL EDITOR 1 ON ○ PBS WSP= Cable 7 2 OFF CNT Cable 3 3 ON ●KIS WBE Cable 4 4 ON VCDV= Cable 5 5 ON FOX WAT Cable 6 6 ON FOX WMT-DI Cable 7 7 ON SHOWN Cable 8 8 ON HTC WCH= Cable 9 9 ON HCK LCK 10

3 Press ↑/↓ to highlight a channel then press ENTER to go to the Grid Options menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the channel display settings - 3

text_image SCHEDULE EIGHTS SEARCH Move → to change the status of the channel in your listings grid and search results. Set the channel to an off or auto-to-sharrel only appears when show into a available. Channel Editor ON FAT WGS- Cable 2 OUT CNE Cable 3 ON WGS- Cable 4 ON WGS- Cable 5 ON FOX WGS- Cable 6 ON FOX WGS- Cable 7 ON SCHD- Cable 8 ON WGS- Cable 9 ON FCLK Cable

From the Grid Options menu you can set:

  • channel – On (display in channel list), Off (don't display) or Auto Hide (hide when no program information is available)
  • tune channel – the channel number that the channel listing is tuned to

  • position – place that the channel appears in the channel list

  • Re-sort numerically to change the channel order in the Listings service (and Channel Editor) to numeric
  • Undo all changes to reset all the Channel Editor options (and Listings display) to their original (factory) settings

4 When you've made all the settings you want for the channel, highlight "done" then press ENTER.

- To cancel without saving any of the changes you made, select "cancel".

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the channel display settings - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the channel display settings - 5

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the channel display settings - 6

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the channel display settings - 7

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the channel display settings - 8

TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation

Changing the default options

This is the place to change the default settings for reminders and other general settings.

1 Select the "Change default options" item.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the default options - 1

text_image TV SCHEDULE OPTIONS SEARCH OPEN Press Ok to be default categories • General • Remind SETUP Change system settings Change channel display Change default options Display setup progress

2 Select one of the two default option categories.

A different panel menu appears for each option:

General default options

- Info Box size upon entering the Guide

  • Small
  • Large
  • No

- Last used (default)

- Info Box position

  • Float
  • Top (default)

• Video Window status

  • Locked (default)
  • Unlocked

• Channel ID in Listings

-Logo
- Number
- Both (default)

- Auto guide (whether Guide appears automatically when the unit is powered On)

  • On
  • Off (default)

Remind defaults

  • auto tune – automatically tunes to the correct channel when a reminder becomes due (Yes or No)
  • when – when to display the reminder (15 minutes early to 15 minutes late, or On time)

3 When you've made all the settings you want, highlight "done" then press ENTER.

- To cancel without saving any of the changes you made, select "cancel".

Displaying setup progress

Display setup progress lets you verify the status of the various Guide setup functions. This screen also appears when you enter the Guide prior to receiving the complete channel lineup.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Displaying setup progress - 1

text_image TV SCHEDULE LISTINS SEARCH FROM OK to verify the status of various Guide setup functions SETUP Change with kernel settings Change channel display Change default options Display setup progress Sundays Bm on the Home Network

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Displaying setup progress - 2

text_image TV Guide On Screen Setup Progress STEP STATUS ✓ search for time Done 5/18.8 Style ✓ search for TV stations with TV Guide data In Progress ✓ search for channel group Done ✓ next filings transmission None scheduled

Adjustments and Settings

Chapter 11

Adjustments and Settings

AV Selection

Select from the six viewing options, depending on the current environment (e.g., room brightness), the type of the current TV program, or the type of images input from external equipment.

1 Press AV SELECTION.

• The current AV Selection mode appears.

2 Press AV SELECTION again before the displayed mode disappears.

  • For AV source, the mode is switched in this order; OPTIMUM, STANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, then USER.
  • For PC source, the mode is switched between STANDARD and USER.

You can also use the menu to change the options.

1 Press HOME MENU.

2 Select "Picture" (/ʌthən ENTER).

3 Select "AV Selection" (/ʌthn ENTER).

4 Select the desired option (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Select the desired option (/ then ENTER). - 1

text_image AV Selection ● OPTIMUM STANDARD DYNAMIC MOVIE GAME USER

For AV source

Item Description

OPTIMUM Automatically adjusts the brightness of the image to the optimum level in accordance with the brightness level of the viewing area. This selection is shared by the external input and TV input sources.

STANDARD For a highly defined image in a normally bright room. This selection is shared by the external input and TV input sources.

DYNAMIC For a very sharp image with maximum contrast This mode does not allow manual image quality adjustment. This selection is shared by the external input and IV input sources.

MOVIE For movies. This selection is shared by the external input and TV input sources.

GAME Lowers image brightness for easier viewing. This selection is shared by the external input and TV input sources.

USER Allows you to customize settings as desired. You can set the mode for each input source.

For PC source

Item Description

STANDARD For a highly defined image in a normally bright room

USER Allows you to customize settings as desired. You can set the mode for each input source.

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. - 1

Note

  • You can also press AV SELECTION on the remote control unit to switch the viewing option.
  • If you have selected "DYNAMIC", you cannot select "Contrast", "Brightness", "Color", "Tint", "Sharpness", "Pro Adjust" and "Reset"; these menu items are dimmed.
  • If you have selected "OPTIMUM", you cannot select "Pro Adjust"; menu items in "Pro Adjust" are dimmed.
  • To prevent the screen from damage, you can freely change the AV selection mode while enjoying the Home Gallery function. However, when you resume the Home Gallery after having quit it, "STANDARD" is automatically selected for the AV source.
  • While enjoying the Home Gallery, you can freely change the AV selection mode, but you cannot select "USER".
  • As the OPTIMUM function automatically optimizes image quality, the process in which image settings such as brightness and tint gradually change may be seen on the screen. This is not a malfunction.
  • When "OPTIMUM" is selected, images are reproduced based on the information collected at the Room Light Sensor as well, regardless of its setting ("On" or "Off") for the "Option" menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 5

Adjustments and Settings

Basic picture adjustments

Adjust the picture to your preference for the chosen AV Selection option (except DYNAMIC).

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Picture" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select an item to be adjusted (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Basic picture adjustments - 1

text_image Picture AV Selection OPTIMUM Contrast 40 Brightness 0 Color 0 Tint 0 Sharpness 0 Pro Adjust Reset

For PC source, the following screen appears:

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Basic picture adjustments - 2

text_image Picture AV Selection STANDARD Contrast 40 Brightness 0 Red R 0 Green G 0 Blue B 0 Reset

4 Select the desired level (/) →

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Basic picture adjustments - 3

- When an adjustment screen is displayed, you can also change the item to be adjusted, by pressing .

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

For AV source

Itembutton button
Contrast For less contrast For more contrast
Brightness For less brightness For more brightness
Color For less color intensity For more color intensity
Tint Skin tones become purplishSkin tones become greenish
Sharpness For less sharpness For more sharpness

For PC source

Item← button button
Contrast For less contrast for more contrast
Brightness For less brightness For more brightness
Red For weaker redFor stronger red
GreenFor weaker greenFor stronger green
BlueFor weaker blueFor stronger blue

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Basic picture adjustments - 4

Note

  • To perform advanced picture adjustments, select "Pro Adjust" in step 3 and then press ENTER. For the subsequent procedures see Advanced picture adjustments.
  • To restore the factory defaults for all items, press to select "Reset" in step 3, and then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears. Press / to select "Yes", and then press ENTER.
  • You may experience a sudden change in the image position and screen brightness when you open the "Picture" menu.

Advanced picture adjustments

The plasma display provides various advanced functions for optimizing the picture quality. For details on these functions, see the tables.

Using PureCinema

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Picture" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Pro Adjust" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "PureCinema" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select "Film Mode" or "Text Optimization" (/ then ENTER).

6 Select the desired parameter (/ then ENTER).

- For the selectable parameters, see the table.

PureCinema

Automatically detects a film-based source (originally encoded at 24 frames/second), analyzes it, then recreates each still film frame for high-definition picture quality.

Film ModeOffDeactivates the PureCinema
Standard Produces smooth and vivid moving images (film specific) by automatically detecting recorded image information when displaying DVD or high-definition images (e.g., movies) having 24 frames per second
SmoothProduces smoother and more vivid moving images
AdvanceProduces smooth and quality moving images (as shown on theatre screens) by converting to 72 Hz when displaying DVD images (e.g., movies) having 24 frames per second
Text OptimizationOffDeactivates Text Optimization
OnImproves subtitle display quality

7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

11

Adjustments and Settings

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Adjustments and Settings - 1

Note

  • Standard" is not selectable for the following input signals: 480p, 720p@60 Hz, 1080p@60 Hz.
  • "Smooth" is not selectable for the following input signals: 1080p@60 Hz.
  • "Advance" is not selectable for the following input signals: 1080p@60 Hz.
  • When you select "On" for "Game Control Pref" on the "Option" menu, the "PureCinema" setting is disabled.

Using the Picture Detail

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Picture" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Pro Adjust" (/ʌhən ENTER).
4 Select "Picture Detail" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select an item to be adjusted (/ then ENTER).

- You can select "DRE Picture", "Black Level", "ACL", "Enhancer Mode" or "Gamma".

6 Select the desired parameter (/ ♦ then ENTER).

DRE Picture

Emphasizes the contrast on images so that the difference between brightness and darkness becomes more distinct:

Selections Off Deactivates DRF Picture

High Enhanced DRE Picture

Mid Standard DRE Picture

Low Moderate DRE Picture

Black Level

Emphasizes dark portion on images so that the difference between brightness and darkness becomes more distinct:

Selections Off Deactivates Black Level

On Activates Black Level

ACL

Performs such compensation that results in the optimum contrast characteristics for images

Selections Off Deactivates ACL

On Activates ACL

Enhancer Mode

Selects processing of the image's high frequency (delayed) areas

Selections 1 Selects Hard (SHARPNESS) image

2 Selects Natural (SHARPNESS) image

3 Selects Soft (SHARPNESS) image

Gamma

Adjusts the gamma characteristics (image gradation characteristics)

Selections 1 Selects gamma characteristics 1

2 Selects gamma characteristics 2

3 Selects gamma characteristics 3

7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Using Color Temp

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Picture" (/ʌhən ENTER).
3 Select "Pro Adjust" (/ʌthn ENTER).
4 Select "Color Detail" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select "Color Temp" (/ then ENTER).
6 Select the desired parameter (/ ♠ then ENTER).

Color Temp

Adjusts the color temperature, resulting in a better white balance,

Selections High White with bluish tone

Mid Natural tone

Low White with reddish tone

7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Using CTI

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Picture" (/ʌhən ENTER).
3 Select "Pro Adjust" (/ʌhən ENTER).
4 Select "Color Detail" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select "CTI" (/ then ENTER).
6 Select the desired parameter (/ʌhən ENTER).

CTI

Provides images with clearer color contours. The CTI stands for Color Transient Improvement.

Selections Off Deactivates CT

On Activates CTI

7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Eliminating noise from images

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Picture" (/ʌthən ENTER).
3 Select "Pro Adjust" (/ʌhən ENTER).
4 Select "Noise Reduction" (/ʌthn ENTER).
5 Select an item to be adjusted (/ then ENTER).
- You can select "3DNR" or "Field NR".
6 Select the desired parameter (/ then ENTER).

3DNR

Eliminates video noise for clean crisp images. 3DNR stands for 3-dimensional Noise Reduction.

Selections Off Deactivates 3DNR

High Enhanced 3DNR

Mid Standard 3DNR

Low Moderate 3DNR

PIONEER PDP5080HD - 3DNR - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - 3DNR - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - 3DNR - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - 3DNR - 4

Adjustments and Settings

Field NR
Removes glimmer for more natural images

Selections Off Deactivates Field NR
High Enhanced Field NR
Mid Standard Field NR
Low Moderate Field NR

7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Comparing picture adjustments on the screen

During picture adjustments, you can quickly refer to the image previously set in the same parameter, allowing you to easily compare and select the preferred image quality.

1 Press HOME MENU.

2 Select "Picture" (/ then ENTER).

3 Select an item to be adjusted (/ then ENTER).

4 While performing adjustment, press BLUE on the remote control unit.

"Before" displays and the image adjusted last time appears for comparison.

Before

5 Press the button again to return to the newly adjusted image.

Each press of the button toggles between "Before" and "After".

6 Repeat steps 1 and 5 for other parameters.

7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Caution

  • If you exit the menu by pressing HOME MENU or no operation is performed for 60 seconds, all the parameter settings displayed last are stored in memory.
  • If you want to exit the menu without performing the adjustments (or leaving the settings disabled) on the "After" screen, switch to "Before" and then exit.

Note

  • You cannot adjust any item while on the "Before" screen. A warning message appears.
  • When you switch to another parameter, make sure to change the display from "Before" to "After" first, otherwise you cannot select "Before". A warning message appears if you don't.
  • If you exit the selection from the "Before" screen, the previous entry is stored in the memory and the button no longer works.
  • If you exit the selection from the "After" screen, the new entry is stored in the memory and the button no longer works.
  • If you move and change the "AV Selection" parameter, the new entry in the current parameter is stored in the memory and the button continues to work.
  • You cannot compare images between different parameters on the "AV Selection" menu ("STANDARD" and "MOVIE", for example).

  • When you select this function, "OPTIMUM" on the "AV Selection" menu and "Room Light Sensor" on the "Option" menu are set to off and image quality returns to default settings.
    • This function is not selectable:

  • when you select "AV Selection",
  • when you select "Yes" or "No" on the confirmation screen for "Reset" from the "Picture" menu or
  • when you select a menu from the PC source

Sound adjustments

You can adjust the sound quality to your preference with the following settings.

Adjust the sound to your preference for the chosen AV Selection option. See page 54.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Sound" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select an item to be adjusted (/)
4 Select the desired level (/) →

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Sound adjustments - 1

text_image Sound [STANDARD] Treble - + 2 + Bass 0 Balance 0 Reset Sound Effect
Item← buttonbutton

Treble For weaker treble For stronger treble

Bass For weaker bass For stronger bass
Balance Shifts the audio balance to the leftShifts the audio balance to the right

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Note

  • You cannot adjust the sound for listening with headphones.
  • If you perform sound adjustments with headphones connected, the new settings will become effective as soon as you disconnect the headphones.
  • To restore the factory defaults for all the items, press select "Reset" in step 3, and then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears. Press select "Yes", and then press ENTER.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

11

Adjustments and Settings

Sound Effect

You can select from SRS FOCUS, SRS or SRS TruBass.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Sound" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Sound Effect" (/ ♦ then ENTER).
4 Select "SRS FOCUS", "SRS" or "SRS TruBass" (/▶↓
5 Select the desired parameter (/★→

SRS FOCUS

Selections Off Deactivates SRS FOCUS
On Activates SRS FOCUSShifts the apparent direction of the sound upward for more clearly defined sound

SRS

Selections Of Deactivates SRS®
On Activates SRS®
Reproduces highly effective three-dimensional sound

SRS TruBass

Selections Off Deactivates SRS TruBass
On Activates SRS TruBass3
Provides deep, rich bass using a new technology

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. - 1

Note

• (VTRS) denotes a status where SRS FOCUS

SRS ^® and SRS TruBass ^® are on.

  • You cannot adjust the sound effect for listening with headphones.
  • If you change the sound effect with headphones connected, the new setting will become effective as soon as you disconnect the headphones.
    • The effect of this function differs depending on signals.

Power Control

Power Control provides convenient functions for saving power.

Energy Save

You may use one of the three Energy Save modes to save power consumption.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Power Control" (/ ♦ then ENTER).
3 Select "Energy Save" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Mode 1", "Mode 2", or "Picture Off" (↑/↓ then ENTER).

Item Description

OffDoes not decrease picture brightness
Mode 1 Slightly lowers power consumption while slightly suppressing the brightness drop level
Mode 2Decreases the picture brightness and lowers power consumption
Picture Off Deactivates the screen to save power. To restore the screen display, press any button other than VOL +/- and MUTING.This setting is not memorized by the system.

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Note

  • When you change the Energy Save mode, you may notice a change in the panel sound. This is normal.
  • Energy Save maintains efficiency of the screen for a long period of time by decreasing picture brightness and lowering power consumption. Setting Energy Save to "Mode 1" is recommended for increased efficiency.

No Signal off (AV source only)

The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode if no signal is received for 15 minutes.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Power Control" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "No Signal off" (/ʌhən ENTER).
4 Select "Enable" (/ʌhən ENTER).

Item Description

Disable (default)Does not place the system into the standby mode
EnablePlaces the system into the standby mode if no signal is received for 15 minutes

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Note

  • Five minutes before the system is placed into the standby mode, a message appears every minute.
  • The system may not be placed into the standby mode when noise signals are present at the plasma display after a TV program finishes.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 5

Adjustments and Settings

No Operation off (AV source only)

The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode when no operation is performed for three hours.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Power Control" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "No Operation off" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Enable" (/ then ENTER).

Item Description

Disable (default)Does not place the system into the standby mode

Enable Places the system into the standby mode if no operation is performed for three hours

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. - 1

Note

- Five minutes before the system is placed into the standby mode, a message appears every minute.

Power Management (PC source only)

The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode when no signal is received from the personal computer.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Power Control" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Power Management" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" (↑/↓ then ENTER).

Item Description

Off (default)No power management
Mode 1 • Places the system into the standby mode when no signal is received from the personal computer for eight minutes.
• Even when you start using the computer and a signal is received again, the system stays off.
• The system is switched on again by pressing STANDBY/ON on the plasma display or TV φ on the remote control unit.
Mode 2 • Places the system into the standby mode when no signal is received for eight seconds.
• When you start using the computer and a signal is received again, the system is switched on.
• The system is switched on again by pressing STANDBY/ON on the plasma display or TV ☐ on the remote control unit.

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. - 1

Note

- This function is not selectable when the PC is connected to the HDMI terminal.

Sleep Timer

When the selected time elapses, the Sleep Timer automatically places the system into the standby mode.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Sleep Timer" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select the desired time (/ then ENTER).
Select "Off" (cancel), "30 min", "60 min", "90 min" or "120 min".
4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Sleep Timer - 1

Note

  • Five minutes before the selected time elapses, the remaining time appears every minute.
  • To check the remaining time, perform steps 1 and 2. After checking the time, press HOME MENU to restore the previous display.
  • The SLEEP indicator on the front of the plasma display lights orange when the sleep limer is set.

11

Adjustments and Settings

About "Option" menus

The "Option" menu consists of two screens. To select the desired menu, press ▼▶peatedly to switch between Screen 1 and Screen 2. The current screen number appears at the top right corner on the screen.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - About "Option" menus - 1

text_image Option 1/2 Position Auto Size Wide-Zoom Side Mask HDMI Input HDMI Control Setting Blue LED Dimmer Auto Orbiter On Video Pattern

PIONEER PDP5080HD - About "Option" menus - 2

text_image Option Digital Audio Out Dolby Digital Language Tuner NR Setting Game Control Pref Off Room Light Sensor On

(For AV source)

Image position adjustment (AV source only)

Adjusts the horizontal and vertical positions of images on the plasma display.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ʌhən ENTER).
3 Select "Position" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "H/V Position Adjust" (/ʌn ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Image position adjustment (AV source only) - 1

text_image Position H/V Position Adjust Reset

5 Adjust the vertical position (/) or horizontal position (←/→).

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Image position adjustment (AV source only) - 2

Note

  • To restore the factory defaults for all the items, press to select "Reset" in step 4, and then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears. Press I select "Yes", and then press ENTER.
  • Adjustments are stored separately for each input source.
  • Depending on the displayed video, the image position may not change even after adjustment.

Automatic image position and clock adjustments (PC source only)

Use Auto Setup to automatically adjust positions and clock of images coming from a personal computer.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Auto Setup" (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Automatic image position and clock adjustments (PC source only) - 1

text_image Option Auto Setup Manual Setup
  • Auto Setup starts.

4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Automatic image position and clock adjustments (PC source only) - 2

Note

  • When Auto Setup is finished, "Auto Setup completed." appears.
  • Even when "Auto Setup completed." appears, Auto Setup may have failed, depending on conditions.
  • Auto Setup may fail with a PC image composed of similar patterns or monochrome. If not successful, change the PC image and try again.
  • Be sure to connect the computer to the plasma display and switch it on before starting Auto Setup.
  • Depending on the displayed video, the image position may not change even after adjustment.
  • This function is not selectable when the PC is connected to the HDMI terminal.

Manual image position and clock adjustments (PC source only)

Usually you can easily adjust the positions and clock of images using Auto Setup. Use Manual Setup to optimize the positions and clock of images when necessary.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Manual Setup" (/ʌhən ENTER).
4 Select an item to be adjusted (/ʌhən ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Manual image position and clock adjustments (PC source only) - 1

text_image Manual Setup H/V Position Adjust Clock 0 Phase 0 Reset

5 Perform adjustment (/←/). ↑ ↓

- With "Clock" or "Phase" selected, you can change the parameter using .

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Manual image position and clock adjustments (PC source only) - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Manual image position and clock adjustments (PC source only) - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Manual image position and clock adjustments (PC source only) - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Manual image position and clock adjustments (PC source only) - 5

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Manual image position and clock adjustments (PC source only) - 6

Adjustments and Settings

Note

  • To restore the factory defaults for all the items, press to select "Reset" in step 4, and then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears. Press to select "Yes", and then press ENTER.
  • This function is not selectable when the PC is connected to the HDMI terminal.

Reducing video noise

For the individual analog TV channels, you can specify whether the plasma display should reduce video noise depending on the levels of broadcasting signals.

1 Press HOME MENU.

2 Select "Option" (/ then ENTER).

3 Select "Tuner NR Setting" (/ then ENTER).

4 Select "Channel Map" (/)

You can select only analog channels set by the Auto Channel Preset or POD.

5 Select "Tuner NR" (/)↑ ↓

6 Select "On" (/) →

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Reducing video noise - 1

text_image Tuner NR Setting [ANT.A] Channel Map 7 Tuner NR On Channel Keep/Skip Keep

Item Description

On (default) Activates Tuner NR

Off Deactivates Tuner NR

7 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Note

  • This function is only selectable when signals are received through ANT.A or ANT.B.
  • The "Channel Keep/Skip" menu is not selectable. "Keep" or "Skip" is displayed when the setting in "Channel Map" is changed.
  • This function may not achieve satisfactory results, depending on the conditions of broadcasting signals.

Selecting a game mode

When playing a game, you can use this function to establish a preference for image quality or operability.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Game Control Pref" (/ then ENTER).

4 Select "On" or "Off" (/ then ENTER).

Item Description

On Establishes a preference for operability

Off Establishes a preference for image quality

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Note

  • The "Game Control Pref" is only available when using an external input (except a PC source) and "GAME" is selected in "AV Selection".
  • The "Game Control Pref" options are not effective when PC signals are received (when a PC source menu is displayed on the screen).
  • The "On" setting is not effective when freezing images or in the multiscreen mode.

Selecting a screen size manually

In single-screen mode, press SCREEN SIZE to change the size of the screen from among the selectable options for the type of video signals currently received.

- The selectable screen sizes differ depending on the types of input signals.

AV source

Item Description

4:3 For 4:3 "standard" pictures. A side bar appears on each side

WIDE In this mode pictures are progressively stretched toward each side of the screen

FULL For 16:9 squeezed pictures

ZOOM For 16:9 letterbox pictures. Bars may appear on the top and bottom on some programs

CINEMA For 14.9 letteroox pictures. Bars may appear on the top and bottom on some programs

PC source

Item Description

4:3 Fills the screen without altering the input signal aspect ratio

FULL Full 16:9 screen display

Note

  • While watching High Definition TV broadcasting, pressing SCREEN SIZE switches among FULL, ZOOM, WIDE, and 4:3.
  • If you watch High Definition TV broadcasting with WIDE selected, part of the screen (e.g., images, graphic interface) may not appear on the display. If this is the case, select FULL
  • Some HD broadcasts may display 4:3 content with side masks, which may cause uneven wear. After viewing, it is recommended to view full screen motion video (see Detecting side masks on page 62).
  • The selectable screen sizes may differ depending on the conditions.

11

Adjustments and Settings

  • You can freely change the screen size while watching HD broadcasts or enjoying other HD input sources. However, when you resume the HD programs after having quit them, "FULL" is automatically selected for the screen size.
  • The specifications given for the PC source is for the PDP-5080HD. For the PDP-4280HD, the number of panel pixels is different, and thus signal processing and actual viewing conditions will vary slightly.
  • It is not recommended to consistently display signals that do not completely fill the screen. This may cause temporary or permanent image retention depending on the frequency and duration.

AV source PC source
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Adjustments and Settings - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["4:3"] --> B["CINEMA WIDE"]
    A --> C["ZOOM FULL"]
    D["4:3"] --> E["FULL"]
    B --> C
    C --> D

Selecting a screen size automatically

The plasma display automatically selects an appropriate screen size when video signals are received from a connected HDMI device (see page 65). To activate this function, use the following procedure.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ʌhən ENTER).
3 Select "Auto Size" (/ ♦hon ENTER).
4 Select "Natural" or "Wide-Zoom" (/ʌhən ENTER).

Item Description
Off Deactivates the Auto Size function
Natural Naturally adjusts the image to the screen

Wide-ZoomEnlarges and displays only the 4:3 aspect ratio portion in full and wide screen

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Selecting a screen size automatically - 1

Note

  • Manually select an appropriate screen size if an image does not automatically switch to a correct screen format.
  • When the video signal contains no aspect ratio information, the function will not work even with "Natural" or "Wide-Zoom" selected.

Detecting side masks

Some HD broadcasts may display 4:3 content with side masks. The plasma display automatically detects these side masks to provide gray side masks when "Natural" has been selected for "Auto Size", or display the image full screen with the side masks removed when "Wide-Zoom" has been selected. This function does not operate when "Off" is selected for "Auto Size".

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Side Mask" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Detection" (/)* ↓
5 Select "On" (/★→

Item Description

Off Deactivates the Size Mask detection

On Activates the Side Mask detection

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Item Description - 1

Important

- The "On" setting prevents uneven wear on 4:3 content and side masks and can reduce the possibility of image retention.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Important - 1

Note

  • You cannot set the Side Mask detection to "On" or "Off" when "Off" is selected in "Auto Size".
  • Set the Side Mask detection function to "On". The High Definition 16:9 aspect ratio images containing side masks will be detected automatically and side masks will be added or the image displayed in full screen.
  • This Side Mask detection does not operate on 4:3 content displayed in SD (standard definition) broadcasts.
  • "AUTO" will appear on the channel display when this function is on.
  • Detection errors may occur depending on the HD content. In case a detection error occurs, manually change the screen size to the desired size.
  • Side Mask detection may not operate properly for video signals that contain no aspect ratio information. If that is the case, check if "FULL" is selected for the screen size, switch to another input source, then switch back to the original input source again.

Changing the brightness at both sides of the screen (Side Mask)

With the 4:3 screen size, you can change the brightness of the gray side masks that appear at both sides of the screen.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Side Mask" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Brightness Sync." (/)
5 Select the desired parameter ( / * →

Item Description

Fixed (default)Always sets the same brightness for the gray side masks
AutoAdjusts the brightness of the gray side masks according to the brightness of images

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the brightness at both sides of the screen (Side Mask) - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Changing the brightness at both sides of the screen (Side Mask) - 2

Adjustments and Settings

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Adjustments and Settings - 1

Important

  • The "Auto" setting adjusts the brightness of the side masks according to the brightness of the screen and can reduce the possibility of image retention.
    6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Room Light Sensor

This function automatically adjusts the brightness of the display panel in accordance with the brightness level of the viewing area. For details, use the following procedure.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ʌthan ENTER).
3 Select "Room Light Sensor" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "On" or "Off" (/ then ENTER).

Item Description

On Activates the Room Light Sensor function

Off Deactivates the Room Light Sensor function

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Item Description - 1

Note

  • This function is disabled when "OPTIMUM" is selected on the "AV Selection" menu.
  • This function is not available when PC signals are received.
  • As the OPTIMUM function automatically optimizes image quality, the process in which image settings such as brightness and tint gradually change may be seen on the screen. This is not a malfunction.

Blue LED Dimmer

You can adjust the brightness of the POWER ON indicator depending on the brightness level of the viewing area. When "Auto" is selected, the brightness of the indicator changes to "High", "Mid" or "Low" to match the brightness level of the viewing area.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Blue LED Dimmer" (/ʌhən ENTER).
4 Select "Auto", "High", "Mid" or "Low" (/ then ENTER).
5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Orbiter

This function automatically shifts the image little by little.

1 Press HOME MENU.

2 Select "Option" (/ then ENTER).

3 Select "Orbiter" (/ then ENTER).

4 Select "On" (/ʌhən ENTER).

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

- To cancel this function, select "Off" in step 4.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Orbiter - 1

Note

  • When the Orbiter function is set to "On", the image may appear to drop slightly on the screen.
  • This function does not operate when PC signals are received.

Video Pattern

You can display the Video Pattern screen that also helps alleviate after-image if it occurs.

1 Press HOME MENU.

2 Select "Option" (/ then ENTER).

3 Select "Video Pattern" (/ then ENTER).

A confirmation screen appears.

4 Select "Start" (ENTER).

The Video Pattern screen displays.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Video Pattern - 1

Note

  • The system is automatically placed into the standby mode one hour after the Video Pattern screen has started.
  • While the Video Pattern screen is on, no buttons operate except TV ^↓ on the remote control unit. STANDBY/ON and ^↓ on the plasma display.
  • To cancel the Video Pattern screen, press TV on the remote control unit, STANDBY/ON or on the plasma display.
  • The Video Pattern timer has priority over the sleep timer. When the Video Pattern timer is on, the sleep timer becomes ineffective.

Language setting

You can select a language to be used for on-screen display such as menus from among three languages: English, French, and Spanish.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ʌhən ENTER).
3 Select "Language" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select a language (/★→

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Language setting - 1

text_image Language Menu English

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Enjoying through External Equipment

Chapter 12

Enjoying through External Equipment

About External Equipment

You can connect many types of external equipment to your plasma display, like a DVD player, VCR, personal computer, game console, and camcorder.

To view images coming from external equipment, select the input source using the INPUT 1 to INPUT 7 buttons on the remote control or the INPUT button on the plasma display.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - About External Equipment - 1

Caution

- To protect all equipment, always unplug the plasma display from the power outlet before connecting to a DVD player, VCR, personal computer, game console, camcorder, or other external equipment.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Caution - 1

Note

- Refer to the relevant instruction manual (DVD player, personal computer, etc.) carefully before making connections.

Watching a DVD image

Connecting a DVD player

Use the INPUT 2 terminals when connecting a DVD player and other audiovisual equipment.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connecting a DVD player - 1

text_image Rear view Component Video cable (commercially available) AV cable (commercially available) DVD player

Displaying a DVD image

To watch a DVD image, press INPUT 2 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the plasma display to select "INPUT 2".

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Displaying a DVD image - 1

Note

  • Refer to your DVD player instruction manual for the signal type.
  • The INPUT 2 terminals are checked whether they are connected in the following order: 1) Component Video, 2) S-Video, 3) Video.
    Use the desired connection for viewing.
  • Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used.

Watching a VCR image

Connecting a VCR

Use the INPUT 1 terminals when connecting a VCR and other audiovisual equipment.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connecting a VCR - 1

text_image Rear view S-Video cable (commercially available) AV cable (commercially available) VCR

Displaying a VCR image

To watch a VCR image, press INPUT 1 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the plasma display to select "INPUT 1".

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Displaying a VCR image - 1

Note

  • The INPUT 1 terminals are checked whether they are connected in the following order: 1) S-Video, 2) Video. Use the desired connection for viewing.
  • Connect external equipment only to terminals that are actually to be used.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

Enjoying through External Equipment

Using HDMI Input

The INPUT 4, INPUT 5, INPUT 6. INPUT 7 terminals are HDMI terminals to which digital video and audio signals can be input. To use the HDMI terminal, specify the types of video and audio signals to be received from the connected equipment. For the types of these signals, see the operation manual that came with the connected equipment.

Before starting the menu, press INPUT 4, INPUT 5, INPUT 6. INPUT 7 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the plasma display to select INPUT 4, INPUT 5, INPUT 6 or INPUT 7.

Video signals supported

720 (1440) x 480i@59.94 Hz/60 Hz
720 x 480p@59.94 Hz/60 Hz
1280 x 720p@59.94 Hz/60 Hz
1920 x 1080 @59.94 Hz/60 Hz
1920 x 1080p@24 Hz
1920 x 1080p@60 Hz

PC signals supported

640 x 480 (VGA) 60 Hz
800 x 600 (SVGA) 60 Hz
1024 x 768 (XGA) 60 Hz
1360 x 768 (Wide - XGA) 60 Hz
1280 x 1024 (SXGA) 60 Hz

For audio, the system supports the following:

• Linear PCM (STEREO 2ch)
• Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

HDMI Control supported

The plasma display supports the HDMI Control functions. By connecting devices that support the HDMI Control functions to the plasma display, you can control the connected device(s) from the plasma display or remote control unit of the plasma display. See "Using the HDMI Control" on Chapter 13.

Deep Color supported

Deep Color means the color depth that describes the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Besides the conventional RGB/YCbCr16 bit/20 bit/24 bit signals, the plasma display also supports RGB/YCbCr30 bit/36 bit signals. This enables finer, minute color reproduction when a device that supports Deep Color signals (HDMI1.3) is connected to the plasma display. When Deep Color signals are received, the color depth appears on the channel display.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Deep Color supported - 1

Note

  • It may take a short while until the image is displayed, depending on the equipment connected.
  • When connecting a PC to the HDMI terminal, use the HDMI compliant PC or video card.
  • When connecting a PC to the HDMI terminal using a DVI output terminal, the plasma display may not display properly. If that is the case, consult with your PC manufacturer.
  • PC picture and/or sound may not be displayed or heard properly depending on the PC used.

Connecting HDMI equipment

When using the INPUT 4 terminal:

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connecting HDMI equipment - 1

text_image Rear view Viewed from below of the plasma display AUDIO CUT INPUT 4 INPUTS OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT AUDIO CUT

When using the INPUT 7 terminal:

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connecting HDMI equipment - 2

text_image Rear view HDMI compliant cable (HDMI cable having the HDMI mark) HDMI equipment

12 Enjoying through External Equipment

To specify the type of input signals

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "HDMI Input" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Signal Type" (/ʌhən ENTER).
5 Select "Video" or "PC" (/ then ENTER).

Item Description

Video (default) Select this option except when a PC is connected

PC Select this option when a PC is connected to the HDMI input terminal

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. - 1

Caution

- Make sure to select "PC" when a PC is connected to the HDMI input terminal.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Caution - 1

Note

  • In the "Video" mode, the image is "over-scanned" (enlarged), and the mode is automatically switched to "PC" when PC signals are received.
  • In the "PC" mode, the image is displayed in full size for optimum image quality.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1
when "Video" is selected ("overscan" size screen)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2
when "PC" is selected ("underscan" size screen)

To specify the type of digital video signals

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ʌhən ENTER).
3 Select "HDMI Input" (/ʌhən ENTER).
4 Select "Video" (/ʌn ENTER).

5 Select the type of digital video signals (/ then ENTER).

- If you select "Auto", an attempt will be made to identify the type of digital video signals when digital video signals are received.

Item Description

Auto (default) Automatically identifies input digital video signals

Color-1 Digital Component Video signals (4:2:2) locked

Color-2 Digital Component Video signals (4:4:4) locked

Color-3 Digital RGB signals (16 to 235) locked

Color-4 Digital RGB signals (0 to 255) locked

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Item Description - 1

Note

  • If you select a parameter other than "Auto", make such a setting that results in natural color.
  • If no image appears, specify another digital video signal type.
  • For the digital video signal types to be specified, check the operation manual that came with the connected equipment.

To specify the type of audio signals

When you use the INPUT 4 or INPUT 5 HDMI terminal, select the terminal for the desired input source, then perform the following procedure to specify the type of audio signals.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "HDMI Input" (/ʌhən ENTER).
4 Select "Audio" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select the type of audio signals (/ then ENTER).

- If you select "Auto", an attempt will be made to identify the type of audio signals when audio signals are received.

Item Description

Auto (default) Automatically identifies input audio signals

Digital Accepts digital audio signals

Analog Accepts analog audio signals

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press HOME MENU to exit the menu. - 1

Note

  • If no sound is output, specify another audio signal type.
  • For the audio signal types to be specified, check the operation manual that came with the connected equipment.
  • Depending on the equipment to be connected, you also need to connect analog audio cables.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 4

Enjoying through External Equipment

Enjoying a game console or watching camcorder images

Connecting a game console or camcorder

Use the INPUT 3 terminals to connect a game console, camcorder and other audiovisual equipment.

Plasma display (left side view)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connecting a game console or camcorder - 1

text_image Component Video cable (commercially available) AV cable (commercially available) Camcorder/Game console

Displaying an image of the game console or camcorder

To watch an image coming from the game console or camcorder, press INPUT 3 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the plasma display to select INPUT 3.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Displaying an image of the game console or camcorder - 1

Note

  • The INPUT 3 terminals are checked whether they are connected in the following order: 1) Component Video, 2) Video.
    Use the desired connection for viewing.

- Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used.

Connecting other audio equipment

The digital audio output terminal (optical) on this system can output Dolby Digital signals. Using an optical digital cable, connect an AV receiver to the digital audio output terminal (optical) on the rear of the plasma display. This allows audio such as digital TV broadcasting to be played in high quality. If your AV receiver does not have a digital audio input terminal (optical), you may connect the AUDIO OUT terminals (AUDIO) on the rear of the plasma display to the audio input terminals on the AV receiver. However, this method may result in audio delay between the speakers and AUDIO, which may be reduced by muting the speakers on the plasma display. Nonetheless, you may experience delay between audio and video.

Connecting an AV receiver
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connecting other audio equipment - 1

text_image Rear view INPUT INPUTS INPUT A AV WOOFER L ALDO P AUDIO OUT INPUT OPTICAL CCK OUT A AV Subwoofer This connection is not required when connecting an AV amp equipped with the surround function to a subwoofer. UV cable (commercially available) Optical digital cable (commercially available) Subwoofer AV receiver

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connecting other audio equipment - 2

Note

  • When using the digital audio output terminal (optical), you need to make settings depending on your AV receiver. For more information, see the instruction manual that came with the AV receiver.
  • For details, refer to the operation manual for the audio equipment to be connected.
  • Audio signals synchronized with currently displayed images are always output to the AUDIO OUT terminals.
  • The audio accompanying the images shown on the display are always output to the SUBWOOFER output terminal.
  • When signals are input from the HDMI terminals, no signals are output from the DIGITAL OUT terminal.

12

Enjoying through External Equipment

Switching the optical audio signal type

Set up for the DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL), depending on your AV receiver.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "Digital Audio Out" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Dolby Digital" or "PCM" (/ then ENTER).

Item Description

Dolby Digital (default)For Dolby Digital encoded signals, outputs in the Dolby Digital format. For PCM encoded signals, outputs in the PCM format.
PCM Always outputs in the PCM format regardless of the types of signals

5 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Watching an image from a personal computer

Connecting a personal computer

Use the PC terminals to connect a personal computer.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connecting a personal computer - 1

Note

• The PC input terminals are DDC2B-compatible.
- Plug & Play may not correctly function, depending on the personal computer in use.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

text_image Rear view Viewed from below of the plasma display OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT AUDIO STUDIO INPUT RGB cable (commercially available) AV cable with a mini plug (commercially available) (When PC audio is connected) Personal computer

Displaying an image from a personal computer

When connected to a personal computer, the input signal type is automatically identified. If the personal computer image does not come in clearly, you may need to use Auto Setup. See page 60.

To watch an image coming from the personal computer, press PC on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the plasma display to select "PC".

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Displaying an image from a personal computer - 1

Note

- The PC terminals cannot be used for audio-visual equipment.

Signal names for 15-pin mini D-sub connector

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Signal names for 15-pin mini D-sub connector - 1

Pin No. Signal name

1 R
2 G
3 B
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 GND (ground)
7 GND (ground)
8 GND (ground)
9 +5 V
10 GND (ground)
11 Not connected
12 SDA
13 HD
14 VD
15 SCL

Computer compatibility chart

Resolution Frequency

720 x 400 70 Hz
640 x 480 (VGA) 60 Hz
800 x 600 (SVGA) 60 Hz
1280 x 720 60 Hz
1024 x 768 (XGA) 60 Hz
1360 x 768 (Wide-XGA)60 Hz
1280 x 1024 (5XGA)60 Hz

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Computer compatibility chart - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Computer compatibility chart - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Computer compatibility chart - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Computer compatibility chart - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Computer compatibility chart - 5

Enjoying through External Equipment

Connecting control cords

Connect control cords between the plasma display and other Pioneer equipment having the SRco. You can then operate the connected equipment by sending commands from its remote control unit to the remote control sensor on the plasma display. After the CONTROL IN terminals have been connected, the remote control sensors on the connected equipment do not accept commands from the remote control units. Face the remote control units to the remote control sensor on the plasma display when operating the connected equipment.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connecting control cords - 1

Note

  • Make sure that the power is turned off when making connections.
  • Complete all component connections before making control cord connections.

About SR+

The CONTROL OUT terminal on the rear of the plasma display supports SR+, which allows linked operations with a Pioneer AV receiver. SR+ presents functions such as the input switch linkage operation function and the DSP surround mode display function. For more information, see the instruction manual that came with the Pioneer AV receiver supporting SR+.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - About SR+ - 1

Note

  • When making control cord connections, use the SR+ cable.
  • When making control cord connections with one or more pieces of Pioneer equipment, directly connect the plasma display and the Pioneer amplifier that supports SR+. Do not connect other equipment between them.
  • When the connected equipment is being operated using SR+, the volume on the plasma display is temporarily reduced.

Plasma display
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Back view"] --> B["Switch"]
    B --> C["Device 1"]
    B --> D["Device 2"]
    B --> E["Device 3"]
    B --> F["Device 4"]
    B --> G["Device 5"]
    B --> H["Device 6"]
    B --> I["Device 7"]
    B --> J["Device 8"]
    B --> K["Device 9"]
    B --> L["Device 10"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    note right of B: 'When SR+ is not used (a, b, and c): The control cables (commercially available) are mono sound cables with mini plugs (no resistance).'

When SR+ is not used (a, b, and c):
The control cables (commercially available) are mono sound cables with mini plugs (no resistance).
When SR+ is used (a); Use the SR+ cable (available as option).

12 Enjoying through External Equipment

On this system, you can watch JPEG images that have been captured and stored in memory cards using a digital still camera. You can also connect your digital camera directly to the plasma display using a USB connector cable.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Enjoying through USB interface (Home Gallery function) - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Digital still camera"] --> B["USB connector cable"]
    B --> C["USB flash drive"]
    C --> D["Multi-card reader"]
    D --> E["Image data display"]

Note

  • A single USB device can only be connected at a time. No USB hub can be connected.
  • Such devices as a printer or keyboard cannot be connected and used.

Readable memory cards

This system can read memory cards whose formats are FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, or VFAT.

Readable data files

This system can read only JPEG files that meet the following conditions:

• Extensions are JPG or JPEG.
• JPEG 4:2:2 and 4:2:0 format
- The image resolution must be less than 3264 pixels in the horizontal direction and 2448 pixels in the vertical direction.
- The image resolution must be higher than 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 120 pixels in the vertical direction.

Note

  • This system may not be able to display images, depending on the type of your memory card, or camera.
  • This system may not be able to display images modified or edited using a personal computer or other equipment.
    • This system complies with the USB Mass Storage Class.

Connecting a USB device

Hold the USB device's connector with its top side facing the front panel, and then insert it into the USB port on the side of the plasma display.

  • Insert the USB device's connector as far as it goes.
  • When using the USB connector of your device, connect it directly to the USB port.

Side of the plasma display
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connecting a USB device - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["USB Flash Drive"] --> B["USB Card"]
    B --> C["Camera"]
    C --> D["USB Monitor"]

Removing a USB device

To remove a USB device's connector, quit the Home Gallery screen and then remove it.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Removing a USB device - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["USB Port"] --> B["Camera"]
    B --> C["Monitor"]
    D["USB Port"] --> B
    E["USB Port"] --> B
    F["USB Port"] --> B
    G["USB Port"] --> B
    H["USB Port"] --> B
    I["USB Port"] --> B
    J["USB Port"] --> B
    K["USB Port"] --> B
    L["USB Port"] --> B
    M["USB Port"] --> B
    N["USB Port"] --> B
    O["USB Port"] --> B
    P["USB Port"] --> B
    Q["USB Port"] --> B
    R["USB Port"] --> B
    S["USB Port"] --> B
    T["USB Port"] --> B
    U["USB Port"] --> B
    V["USB Port"] --> B
    W["USB Port"] --> B
    X["USB Port"] --> B
    Y["USB Port"] --> B
    Z["USB Port"] --> B
    AA["USB Port"] --> B
    AB["USB Port"] --> B
    AC["USB Port"] --> B
    AD["USB Port"] --> B
    AE["USB Port"] --> B
    AF["USB Port"] --> B
    AG["USB Port"] --> B
    AH["USB Port"] --> B
    AI["USB Port"] --> B
    AJ["USB Port"] --> B
    AK["USB Port"] --> B
    AL["USB Port"] --> B
    AM["USB Port"] --> B
    AN["USB Port"] --> B
    AO["USB Port"] --> B
    AP["USB Port"] --> B
    AQ["USB Port"] --> B
    AR["USB Port"] --> B
    AS["USB Port"] --> B
    AT["USB Port"] --> B
    AU["USB Port"] --> B
    AV["USB Port"] --> B
    AW["USB Port"] --> B

Note

  • For details on connectable devices, see Pioneer's website: http://www.pioneerelectronics.com
  • Be sure to quit the Home Gallery screen before removing the USB device. If you remove the USB device while the Home Gallery screen is displayed, data inside the memory may be damaged.
  • Do not insert or remove the USB device immediately after the system is switched on or off. This may cause data inside the memory to be damaged.
  • Do not turn the digital camera off while the Home Gallery screen is displayed.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

Enjoying through External Equipment

Displaying a device list

After connecting a USB device, a device list screen appears highlighting the device being selected.

1 Press HOME MENU.

2 Select "Home Gallery" (/ then ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Starting the initial Home Gallery screen - 1

text_image Home Gallery Device selection USB tray 1/4 IC1210 CF IC1210 MS IC1210 MM/90 IC1210 SM HKEYC3 Exit

3 Select a device (/ then ENTER).

Selecting a folder

The initial Home Gallery screen shows folders saved in the memory card. Different types of icons appear depending on the contents of folders.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Selecting a folder - 1

— Designates a folder that contains another folder.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Selecting a folder - 2

— Designates a folder that contains no image file.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Selecting a folder - 3

— Designates a folder that contains one or more image files.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Selecting a folder - 4

— Designales one or more image files saved under the root directory.

To select a desired folder, press ♠/▼ and then ENTER. Images in the selected folder are displayed in thumbnail format.

Starting a thumbnail screen

When a folder is selected on the initial Home Gallery screen, images in the folder are displayed in thumbnail format.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Starting a thumbnail screen - 1

text_image Home Gallery [PICTURE SIZE] [SAVED DATE] [FILE NAME] [ROTATION ANGLE] Slide Show StartA SetupB 2 1 3 9 5 7 4 6 8 9 001 002 003 004 004 005 006 007 008 010 011 012 013 014 015 012 014 015 016 RQUSD Fine

① Picture size

② Saved date

③ File name

④ Rotation angle

⑤ Image selection cursor

⑥ Appears for unreadable images.

⑦ Number of the selected file/total number of images in the folder

® Appears when the folder contains more than 16 images.

⑨ Indicates that the picture has been rotated.

Press ↑↓ scroll the screen.

To highlight a desired image, p r ◆◆s ◆◆a n d / t o m o v e t h cursor. Information about the highlighted image appears at the top left of the screen.

Press HOME MENU to quit the Home Gallery function.

12

Enjoying through External Equipment

Starting a standard single-image screen

When the thumbnail screen is displayed, pres ◆ ↓ ◄◆ / highlight a desired image, and then press ENTER. The thumbnail screen closes, and only the selected image is displayed.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Starting a standard single-image screen - 1

text_image Home Gallery [PICTURE SIZE] 1600 x 1200 [SAVED DATE] 2005.08.29 [FILE NAME] 002 [ROTATION ANGLE] 0° ● PreviousA ○ NextB ● RotationC OK! OK! Exit

With the above screen displayed, you can use the following keys to perform various operations:

A BLUE:

Displays the previous image in the normal or full screen.

B RED:

Displays the next image in the normal or full screen.

GREEN:

Rotates the displayed image clockwise. Each press rotates the image in the sequence; 90°, 180°, and then 270°.

ENTER:

Each press switches between the normal screen and the full screen.

HOME MENU:

Quits the Home Gallery function.

Note

  • Be careful not to display the same image for an extended period of time. The image may be burnt into the screen, resulting in a residual image.
  • Images smaller than 1024 × 768 pixels are displayed with blank surrounding.

Starting the Slide Show Setup screen

When the thumbnail screen is displayed, press RED to start the screen to set up the Slide Show that sequentially changes images.

1 Select "Display Mode" (/)

2 Select "Normal" or "Full" (/★→

- With "Full" selected, images are displayed using the full screen.

3 Select "Playback Order" (/)

4 Select "Name Order" or "Random" (/★→

5 Select "Number of Times of Playback" (/)\* ↓

6 Select "Single Time" or "Loop" (/★→

- With "Loop" selected, Slide Show is repeated until RETURN is pressed.

7 Select "Playback Mode" (/)

8 Select "Auto" or "Manual" (/★→

  • With "Auto" selected, images are automatically changed at the specified intervals.
  • With "Manual" selected, the previous image is displayed by pressing BLUE or the next image by pressing RED.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Select "Auto" or "Manual" (/★→ - 1

text_image Home Gallery Slide Show Setup Display Mode: Normal Playback Order: Name Order Number of Times of Playback: Single time Playback Mode: Auto Internal(scc) Subs USE 3.00 Exit

9 If you have selected "Auto" in step 8, press / ♦o↓ select "Interval(sec)", and then press ◀ → select the desired display duration for individual images.

- You can select from among 3 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, and 90 seconds.

10 To start the Slide Show screen, press RETURN to display the thumbnail screen and then press BLUE.

• To quit the Home Gallery function, press HOME MENU

Note

- If you intend to display the Slide Show screen for an extend period of time, select "FULL" for the screen size in order to avoid image retention on the screen.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 5

Enjoying through External Equipment

Starting the Slide Show screen

After setting up the Slide Show, you can start it to sequentially change the images.

1 To start the Slide Show screen, press BLUE when a thumbnail screen is displayed.

  • With "Auto" selected for "Playback Mode", images are automatically changed at the specified intervals.
  • With "Manual" selected for "Playback Mode", press BLUE to display the previous image or RED to display the next image.
  • While images are automatically changed, you can stop and hold automatic image change for approximately five minutes by pressing BLUE. To resume, press and hold BLUE again.

3 Select from normal screen or full screen by pressing ENTER.

• Each press switches between the normal screen and the full screen.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Select from normal screen or full screen by pressing ENTER. - 1

Note

  • When paused during a slideshow is played, the screen is automatically changed to the next image in five minutes.
  • If no operation is continued for five minutes, the Home Gallery function automatically finishes except on the Slide Show screen.

Using the HDMI Control

Chapter 13

Using the HDMI Control

Using the HDMI Control functions

You can operate such Pioneer devices as a recorder, player or AV system support the HDMI Control functions using the remote control of the plasma display.

The HDMI Control functions include playback of content using on-screen control panel on the plasma display. For details, see the table below.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Using the HDMI Control functions - 1

Note

  • Maximum number of devices that can be connected and controlled using the remote control unit of the plasma display is as follows: recorder x 2, player x 2, AV system x 1.
  • Not all device operations may be available for HDMI Control functions.

HDMI Control functions

Function DescriptionUsable devices
Playback of contentThe proper input source is automatically selected and the content is played back on the plasma display as you press PLAY on the connected deviceRecorder/player
On-screen controlRecorder/player operation can be controlled on screen or with the remote control unit of the plasma display (play, stop, fast forward/reverse, etc.)Recorder/player
Display Language SetupInformation on the display menu language is transferred to the recorder or player connected to the plasma display. For details, see the operat on manual that came with the recorder or player.Recorder/player
AV system controlReceiver/amplifier operation can also be controlled with the remote control unit of the plasma display (volume, surround mode and input selection of the HDMI terminal)AV system
Power OnThe plasma display can be turned On when the connected recorder(s) or player(s) is turned On and images are input to the plasma display.Recorder/player
Power OffThe connected device(s) can be turned Off when the plasma display is turned Off.Recorder/player/AV system

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

text_image DAY - DAY TIME CONTROL ENTER PAGE PAGE PCTURN AVOURING CH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 CH RETURN CH RETURN CH RETURN VOL -
  • Press VOL +/− or ⚫ to adjust volume for the AV system.
  • Press , , , , ENTER, RETURN ( ) or color (BLUE, RED, YELLOW, GREEN) buttons to use such functions as the disc navigator on the connected recorder or player.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

Note

  • When using the HDMI Control functions, operate the remote control unit while pointing it toward the remote control sensor (SR) located at the bottom right of the front panel of the plasma display.
  • You cannot use two or more HDMI terminals at the rear of the plasma display at the same time except "Power Off" and "Display Language Setup" functions.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 5

Using the HDMI Control

On-screen control panel

For an AV system

PIONEER PDP5080HD - For an AV system - 1

1 Switches the surround mode in order
9 2 Switches the input source in reverse order
3 Switches the surround mode in reverse order
- Closes the screen to return to the HDMI Control
menu
5 Displays the model number of the connected
device
Vod
7 Switches the input source in order

Press ♠ or ⬆ the remote control unit of the plasma display to switch the surround mode in order or in reverse order, ⬆ or ⬆ switch the input source in order or in reverse order. Pressing HDMI CONTROL turns the control panel screen off to return to the HDMI Control menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - For an AV system - 2

Note

- You cannot operate the recorder/player when you press to switch the input source during operation. To resume the operation, return to the HDMI Control menu and select the desired function again.

For a recorder

PIONEER PDP5080HD - For a recorder - 1

1 Skips commercials
32 Fast reverse
Stops playback
③ Closes the screen to return to the HDMI Control
7 MECU
5 Displays the model number of the connected device
6 Starts playback
7 Fast forward

Press ← or → the remote control unit of the plasma display to select fast reverse or fast forward mode. → skip commercials or → stop playback. Pressing ENTER starts playback and

HDMI CONTROL turns the control panel screen off to return to the HDMI Control menu.

For a player

PIONEER PDP5080HD - For a player - 1

1 Displays the DVD disc menu or Blu-ray disc's pop-up menu on the player
- Fast reverse
3 Stops playback
⑦ Closes the screen to return to the HDMI Control menu
5 Displays the model number of the connected device
6 Starts playback
7 Fast forward

Press ← → the remote control unit of the plasma display to select fast reverse or fast forward mode. → display the DVD disc menu or Blu-ray disc's pop-up menu on the player or → stop playback. Pressing ENTER starts playback and HDMI CONTROL turns the control panel screen off to return to the HDMI Control menu.

Making the HDMI Control connections

When you make changes in connections between the plasma display and the device(s) that supports the HDMI Control functions or settings for the "HDMI Control Setting", perform the following procedure:

1 Turn on the plasma display and all the connected devices.
2 Confirm that the setting in "Input Setting" for "HDMI Control Setting" is properly entered according to the connected devices. Also confirm the HDMI Control related settings in the connected devices.
3 Switch to the HDMI input terminals to which the devices are connected to check if audio and video images are properly output and displayed.
4 Try turning off the plasma display, then turn the power back on to the plasma display.

Connecting an AV amp/BD player

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Connecting an AV amp/BD player - 1

text_image Rear view Optical dig-tal cable (Commercially available) AV cable (commercially available) AV amp HDMI compliant cable (HDMI cable having the HDMI mark) BD olaver

13 Using the HDMI Control

Connecting a BD player
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Using the HDMI Control - 1

text_image Rear view HDMI compliant cable (HDMI cable having the HDMI mark) BD player

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Using the HDMI Control - 2

text_image Rear view AV cable (commercially available) Optical digital cable (commercially available) AV amp BD player HDMI compliant cable (HDMI cable having the HDMI mark)

Note

  • Maximum number of devices that can be connected and controlled using the remote control unit of the plasma display is as follows: recorder x 2, player x 2, AV system x 1.
  • When connecting an AV system, be sure to place and connect it between the plasma display and recorder or player.
  • Do not connect an AV system that does not support the HDMI Control functions between the plasma display and a recorder/player, otherwise the HDMI Control functions may not operate properly.
  • When connecting an AV system that does not support the HDMI Control functions and a player/recorder that supports the HDMI Control functions to the plasma display, connect the AV system to the DIGITAL OUT terminal and the AUDIO OUT terminal on the plasma display using an optical digital cable and an AV cable (commercially available), and the recorder/player to the HDMI terminal using an HDMI compliant cable (see the illustration). Please note that signals input from the HDMI terminals will not be output from the DIGITAL OUT terminal.

  • After making connections, enter the setting in "Input Setting" for "HDMI Control Setting". Be sure that the setting is entered in each HDMI input terminal to which the device is connected.

  • Settings in the connected device(s) are also required to use the HDMI Control functions. For details, see the operation manual that came with the connected device(s).
  • For more information on the devices that support the HDMI Control functions, check the Pioneer Web site (see back cover).

Setting the HDMI Control

Selecting the input terminal

Select the HDMI terminal to which the external device is connected in order to use the HDMI Control functions.

1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select "Option" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "HDMI Control Setting" (/ʌhən ENTER).

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Selecting the input terminal - 1

text_image HDMI Control Setting Input Setting INPUT 4 Power Off Control On Power-On Ready On Hold Sound Status Off Power On Test Power Off Test

4 Select "Input Setting" (/ʌhən ENTER).

5 Select "INPUT 4", "INPUT 5", "INPUT 6" or "INPUT 7" (↑/↓ then ENTER).

Only the device that supports the HDMI Control and is connected through the selected INPUT terminal is available for the HDMI Control functions.

6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Selecting the input terminal - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Selecting the input terminal - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Selecting the input terminal - 4

Using the HDMI Control

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Using the HDMI Control - 1

Note

  • If you have selected "Off" in step 5, a message "Operations cannot be carried out. Confirm the HDMI control settings," appears when HDMI CONTROL is pressed on the remote control unit.
  • If you operate an HDMI supported device(s) using an HDMI terminal other than the terminal selected in "Input Setting", a malfunction may occur. When connecting to any HDMI terminals other than the terminal selected in "Input Setting", make sure to enter the settings of the external device(s) so that the HDMI Control function does not operate.

Selecting the Power Off Control

You can select whether or not the connected device is turned Off when the plasma display is turned Off. (factory default is "On")

1 Press HOME MENU.

2 Select "Option" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "HDMI Control Setting" (/ then ENTER).
4 Select "Power Off Control" (/ then ENTER).
5 Select "On" (/ then ENTER).
6 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Press HOME MENU. - 1

Note

- The "Power Off Control" function is valid for the devices connected to any of HDMI terminals at the rear of the plasma display.

Selecting the Power-On Ready

You can select whether or not the plasma display is turned On when the connected Pioneer recorder or player is turned On and images are input to the plasma display. (factory default is "On")

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in Selecting the Power Off Control.
2 Select "Power-On Ready" (/ʌhən ENTER).
3 Select "On" (/ʌthan ENTER).
4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Selecting the Hold Sound Status

You can select whether or not the function is held for the connected Pioneer AV system even if the system is placed into standby during HDMI Control operations. (factory default is "Off")

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in Selecting the Power Off Control.
2 Select "Hold Sound Status" (/ then ENTER).
3 Select "On" (/ʌn ENTER).
4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

Power On/Off Test

You can confirm if the Power On/Off control function is effective between the plasma display and the connected device.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in Selecting the Power Off Control.
2 Select "Power On Test" or "Power Off Test" (/ then ENTER).

A list containing devices appears when multiple HDMI devices are connected to the HDMI terminals.

3 Select the desired device (/ then ENTER).
4 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Power On/Off Test - 1

Note

  • Devices that can be checked for Power On/Off Test are those connected to HDMI terminals as set in "Input Setting".
  • If the Power On/Off Test fails, check for the connection and setting.

Using the HDMI Control menus

You can enjoy various functions with the connected Pioneer recorder, player or AV system that supports the HDMI Control functions by selecting and using the corresponding HDMI Control menus.

1 Press HOME MENU.

2 Select "HDMI Control" (/ʌhən ENTER).

The HDMI Control menu is displayed.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Select "HDMI Control" (/ʌhən ENTER). - 1

text_image HDMI Control Disc Navigator CTRL Panel(AV-SYS) Playback CTRL Panel Switch to AV Sound

HDMI Control menu

Item Description

Disc Navigator Displays a title list of the connected recorder or player
CTRL Panel (AV-SYS)Displays the control panel for the connected AV system on the plasma display
Playback CTRL PanelDisplays the control panel for the connected recorder or player on the plasma display.
Switch to AV Sound (Switch to PDP Sound)Switches between the plasma display and the connected AV system to which sounds is output

PIONEER PDP5080HD - HDMI Control menu - 1

Note

• To use the HDMI Control functions, a Pioneer recorder, player or AV system that supports the HDMI Control functions is required.
- Not all operations may be controlled for the connected devices.
- The HDMI Control menu is not selectable when "Off" is selected in "Input Setting" for the "HDMI Control Setting" menu.
- The CTRL Panel (AV-SYS) menu is only available when the sound is output from the AV system.
- The Playback CTRL Panel menu is selectable when the connected recorder or player is ready to operate.
- You can also display the HDMI Control menu by pressing HDMI CONTROL on the remote control unit of the plasma display.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 5

Useful Remote Control Features

Chapter 14

Useful Remote Control Features

Presetting manufacturer codes to control other devices

Presetting manufacturer codes

1 Slide the Mode switch to match the device to which you want to preset the remote control signal.
2 Press EDIT and 1 at the same time.

- The LED flashes.

3 Press 0 to 9 to enter the manufacturer code. See page 79.
- Preset mode is finished once the LED no longer lights up.

In the event that the device code for a particular target unit is unknown, you can cycle the remote through the available codes for that device mode and sample functions from each code in order to find the code that properly operates the desired target device.

1 Slide the Mode switch to match the device to which you want to preset the remote control signal.
2 Press EDIT and 3 at the same time.

- The LED indicator flashes and the remote control unit enters the Library Search programming mode.

3 Press either SOURCE POWER, PLAY, 1 or CH+ to sample the selected code.
4 When the code could not be found, press / ♦o↓ advance to the next code or return to the previous code and repeat step 3.
5 Press ENTER when the code that properly operates the desired target device is found.

- All the available buttons for the selected mode are programmed in. The remote control unit returns to normal operation after turning the LED indicator on for one second for confirmation.

Manufacturing Reset

You can reset all the learned and preset codes to default regardless of the mode.

1 Press EDIT and POWER in any Mode switch position at the same time.

- The LED indicator flashes and the remote control unit enters the Manufacturing Reset mode.

2 Press D.

- A manufacturing reset is completed. The LED indicator flashes for one second and the remote control unit returns to normal operation.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Manufacturing Reset - 1

Note

  • To exit the Edit mode before it is complete, press EDIT again.
  • If the Mode switch selection is changed when in the Edit mode, the Edit mode is canceled.
  • If no operation is performed for more than one minute, the Edit mode is canceled.
  • When you enter a code not listed, the LED flashes quickly.
    • The initial mode is "PIONEER"
  • You may not be able to control some equipment in the tables partially or entirely with the supplied remote control unit.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note - 5

Useful Remote Control Features

Programming codes

CABLE

Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes
A-Mark 0006, 0144 Togate 0275 NSC 0012, 0053 Signature 0011
ABC 0237 0008, 0008, 0014, 0011, 0017GE 0144, 0021 Cak 0017 Sony 1006, 1506, 1606
General Instrument 0476, 0810, 0276, 0003, 0012, 0014, 0011Optimus 0021 Sprucer 0144, 002'
Accuphase0003, 00'4, 0011, 0017Pace1877, 0877, 0297, 0008Starcom0003, 0014
Acorn0237Giorater0003Panasonic0000, 0008, 0144, 0197, 0021Stargate 0014
Action0237Global1321Storm0631
Active0237GMI0883Panther0637Supercable0276
Americast0899Go dStar0144Paragon0000, 0005, 0525Supermax0883
Amino1802, 1822Hamlin0009, 0278Penney0000, 0637Thomson1256
Archer0237, 0250 Hitachi 00030008, 0009, 0011, 006der00141305, 0317 Tecom0012
BCC 02761877, 0677, 0144, 0633, 0023, 0260, 1021Torex 0003
Bell & Howell0014Houston3011Toshiba0000
Bell South0899i3 Micro1602Prism0012Tristar0883
British Telecom0003Insight0416, 0810Pulsar0000United Cable0215, 0003, 0014, 0011
Century0008Jebsee0014Quasar0000US Electron os0276, 0003, 0006, 0017
Citation 0017 Jerrold0476, 08'0, 0276.RadioSnack0683 V20683
Clearmaster02830003, 0012, 0014, 0011RCA1256, 0021Videaway0000
ClearMax0283Memorex0000Rega0276, 0279, 0275Viewmaster0883
Cleariron1327Misubishi3003Rembrandt0011ViewmaxPro1544
Cool Box0283 Motorola1576, 0476, 08100276, 1167, 1254, 0014, 106Runco0000 Vision0883
Coolmax0683Samsung0003, 0144, 0023Vortex View0883
Digeo1187Scientific Atlanta1877, 0817, 0477, 0237, 0003, 0000, 0008, 0012, 0017, 0021Zenith0000, 0525, 0599, 0017
Digi0637 Multtech0683
Director0476 Myrio1602, 1822
Du mont0637 Nova Vision 0008 Sejin 1602
Emerson0014Novaplex0006, 0017Signal0011

SATELLITE

Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes
A-Mark 021C GE 0392, 0566 MegaSat1551 Realistic 0052
AlphaStar0772General Instrument0669Memorex0724, 0269Samsung1371, 1142, 1216.
Amino1815GOI0775, 1775Mitsubishi07491138, 1109, 1442, 1609
Bell ExpressWu0775Goodmans1245Motorola0869, 0556Sanyo1219
Channel Master0719Hisense1535NFC0178, 1270SKY0636, 0099
Chaparral0053, 0209, 0215I Hitchi0749, 0819, 1250Netsat0099Sony0639, 1639, 1840
Crossdigital1109Homecable0235Next Level0869Star Choice0869
DirecTV 1377, 0392, 0566,0639, 1639, 1142,0247, 0749, 1749,0724, 0819, 1855,1075, 1108, 0099,1109, 1392, 1414,1442, 1443, 1444,1535, 1609, 1643Houston 0775, 0280 Oprimus 0724 Star Trak0772, 0869, 0180
LTS0775, 0280, 1775Panasonic0247, 0701, 0152STS0210
Hughes Network Systems1142, 0749, 1749,1442, 1443, 1444, 1535Pensal0547, 1551, 1807Thomson0392, 0566
Payset0724 Two1142, 1442, 1443,1444, 1538
Humax 1790 Philips1142, 0749, 1749,
ILO15350775, 0724, 0819,1075, 0722, 0099, 1442Ioshiba0749, 1749, 0790,0819, 0682, 1253
Innova0099
IQ0210
Dish Network System1505, 1005, 0775,1170, 1775IQ Prism0210Pioneer1142, 0329, 1742UltimateTV1322, 1640
Jarell0152Primestar0869Uniden0724, 0722, 0052,3074, 0298
Dishpro1605, 1005, 0775, 1775Jerelolc0869Proscan0392, 0566
EchoStar1505, 1005, 0775,0159, 0269, 0293,1170, 1775JVC0775, 1170, 1775Proton1535US Digital1535
King Viper0210 RadioShack0566, 0775, 0869,USDTV1535
Legend02690052, 0269Voom0869
Expressau0774, 1775 LG1296, 1414 RCA 0392, 0565, 1142,Zenith0556, 1856, 1810
Fortec Star1350 Magnavox0724, 07220775, 0855, 0143,
Tuna!1377 McIntosh06691392, 1442

Useful Remote Control Features

VCR

Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes
A Vark 0051, 0240, 0000,0278, 0346CyberPower 1972 Headquarter 0046 Memercex 035, 0162, 0037,
Jaewoo 0037, 0045, 0778,Hewlett Packam 19720045, 0039, 0047,0240, 0000, 0104,0209, 0072, 0278,0082, 0054, 0046,0307, 0479, 1037,1162, 1262
ABS 1972 H I Q 0055, 0047, 00000000, 0046, 0581, 1137
Admira 0060, 0046, 0039,0047, 0104, 0209,0020, 0029, 0065, 0479Daytron 0037, 0278, 0026 Hitachi 0036, 0337, 0045,
Dell19720000, 0042, 0041,0065, 0082, 0089,0105, 0168, 0938, 0292
Adventura 0037, 0270, 0000 Denver:Denon0081, 0042
Adyson 0072DirecIV0739Howard Computers 1972Metz0037
Alko 0278 Dual 0000 HP 1977 MCA0063, 0740, 0043, 0561
Aliwa 0037, 0000, 0124,0501, 1137Dumont0040 Hughes NetworkSystemsMGN Techno agy0240
Durabranc0039, 0038Microsoft 1972
Akai 0041, 0051, 0106,0175, 0349Dynatech0240, 0000HumaxMidland0240
Electrohome 0060, 0037, 0240,Hush1972 Mind1972
Alba 0209, 0072, 02750000, 0043, 0229, 0061Hytek0047, 0000, 0072Minolta
Allenware 1272Electrophoric0037IBJYPOWER1972Mitsubishi
Allegro 0039, 1137Emerald0184, 0121ITT Nokia0240, 0041
America Action 0278Emerex0032Janel0240
American High 0035, 0081Emerson0037, 0154, 0240,Jensen0067, 0041
Amstad 0000, JVC0067, 0041, 0058,0000, 0121, 0043,0043, 0041, 0061,0075, 0173, 0214,0242, 0440
Anam National 02260209, 0009, 0275,0058, 0061, 0206
Asna 02400202, 0208, 0061,0207, 0235, 1162, 1107Motorola
Asna 0035, 02400212, 0378, 0479,KEC0037, 0278MIC
Audio-Technica 00560581, 0593, 1593Kenwood0067, 0041, 0038, 0046MTX
Audiovox 0037, 0278, 0038, 0054ESA1137KLH0072Multtech
Avis 0000, 0072EverFocus1346Kodak0035, 0037NAD
Beaumark 0240 Fisher0039, 0041, 0000KTV0000 NEC 0104, 0067, 0041,
Bel & Howell 0035, 0048, 0039,0000, 0104, 0046, 04790104, 0046, 0054LG0037, 0270, 0038,1037, 1137
Fuji0035, 0033
Brcksonic 0184, 0121, 0209,0002, 0208, 0479, 1515Fujitsu0000 Linksys1972 New Tech0072
Funai0031, 0000, 0012,Lloyd's0240, 0000, 0072Niko
Calix 00870276, 0593, 15930036, 0040, 0208Nikodo
Candle 0037, 0038Garrard0000Locwo0081Nikon
Canon 0035, 0034Gateway1195, 1196, 1972Logik0240, 0000, 0072, 0011Nishi
Caphart 0002, 0020, 0062 GE0060, 0035, 0048,Lumaron0215 Niveus Media1972
Camera 02400240, 0000, 0149,Luxor0046, 0136Noblex
Carver 0035, 00910065, 0077, 0202,LXI0037, 0000, 0042Northgate
CCF 0079, 02780150, 07610067, 0054Olympus
Cineral 0278Gemini0060V. Electronic0240Onkyo
CireVision 1137Genexia0037, 0000, 0218Magnasonic0037, 0240, 0000Colimus
Citizen 0035, 0037, 0240,0000, 0209, 0278, 0479Go Videc0240, 0432, 0526,0272, 0278, 0220,0282, 0595
0614, 0663, 1137, 1150
Class c 0037 GoldStar 0035, 0037, 0039,0039,Magnavox0035, 0037, 0048,0039, 0081, 0240,0000, 0149, 0211,0254, 0226, 0563.Otonica
Colorlyme 0060, 0035, 0045, 02780000, 0278, 0035,
Colk 0000, 00720054, 1137Orion
Craig 0037, 0047, 0240,0012, 0271Goodmans0037, 0081, 0000,
0012, 0218, 0220, 0062
Criterion 0000, 0072Gradierte0009, 0008Magmir0240
Crosley 0035, 0087, 0000, 0149Granaca0061, 0042, 0011Marantz0055, 0081, 0038, 0062
Crown 0079, 0278Grundig0081, 0034, 0226Marta0037Panama
Curtis Mathes 0060, 0035, 0162,0240, 0000, 0047,0218, 0432, 0760Jarley Davidson 0059 Matsui0137, 0209
Harman/Kardon 0061, 0038, 0015 Matsushila.0035, 0162, 0081, 1162
Harvarc 0072 Media Center PC 1972
Cybermax 0240 Hanwood0072 VE0035

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Useful Remote Control Features - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Useful Remote Control Features - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Useful Remote Control Features - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Useful Remote Control Features - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Useful Remote Control Features - 5

Useful Remote Control Features

VCR

Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes
Panasonic 1062, 0035, 0162,0000, 0020, 0077,0225, 0226, 0221,0245, 0378, 0614,0615, 1162, 1282Realsc o 0035, 0169, 0037,0048, 0047, 0240,0000, 0104, 0121,0278, 0046, 0062,0065, 1162Sonographic 0046 Trix 0037
Sony 0035, 0047, 0032,0033, 0000, 0061,0034, 0046, 0022,0011, 0226, 0215,0635, 1039, 1540,1702, 1703, 1896, 1972Ultra 0045, 0278, 0020
Unilech 0240
Vector 0045
Vector Research 0184, 0038, 0040
Perney 0035, 0162, 0037,0047, 0081, 0240,0000, 0049, 0067,0038, 0070, 0054, 0077ReplayTV 0614, 0616 Vexura 0012Ricavision 1972Ricon 0034Rio 1137 Stack 9 1972Soundmaster 0000
Victor 0057, 0071, 0088
Video Concepts 0045, 0040, 0061,0010, 0279
Pentax 0049, 0065, 0105Runco 0059STS 0072, 0105Videomagic 0057
Prilco 0035, 0061, 0000,0009, 0479Salora 0015SV2000 0000, 0072Videosoric 0040, 0000, 0072
Samsung 0050, 0240, 0045,0000, 0038, 0017,0139, 0139SVA 0000 Viewsonic1972
Philips 0035, 0162, 0048,0061, 0049, 0000,0209, 0034, 0062,0615, 0618, 0139,1061, 1181, 1285Santron 0240 Symphonic 0740, 0000, 0009Sanky 0045, 0039Sansui 0240, 0000, 0061,0209, 0041, 0072,0002, 0062, 0271, 0479Syvania 0035, 0081, 0000,0043, 0693, 1593Villa n 0000Voodoo 1972
Wars 0060, 0035, 00370045, 0047, 0081,0033, 0240, 0045,0000, 0042, 0045,0041, 0072, 0038,0149, 0076, 0055,0062, 0065, 0011,0212, 0479, 0760
Pilot 0037Systemax 1972
agar Systems 1972
Pioneer 0162, 0061, 0042,0067, 0058, 0168, 1337Sanyc 0047, 0240, 0000,0104, 0046, 0159,0372, 0479Tandy 0000, 0104
Telung 0048, 0061, 0008,0067, 0041, 0038
Polk Audio 0067
Port and 0278, 0020Ileac 0000, 0067, 0041
Presid an 1593Scientific Atlanta 0008Technics 0035, 0182, 0037,0000, 0246Wharotecale 0593
Profironic 0240 Scott 0184, 0045, 0121,Proscan 0060, 0202, 0760, 07610043, 0208, 0210, 0212Teknika 0035, 0037, 0000White Westinghouse 0000, 0209, 00780218, 0479
Protoc 0000, 0072Soars 0060, 0035, 0162,0037, 0048, 0039,0047, 0033, 0045,0000, 0042, 0104,0067, 0043, 0209,0041, 0072, 0046,0034, 0054, 0057,0058, 0011, 0065, 0105Telecolor 0240 Word0209, 0002, 0479
Protech 0072Telefunken 0041, 0208XR-10000035, 0240, 0000,0072, 0208
Pulsar 0039, 0240, 0275
Pulsar 0240Taylor 0479Yamaha 0041, 0038
Quarter 0046Thomas 0000, 0002Zenith0037, 0039, 0033,0000, 0209, 0041,0213, 0011, 0054,0478, 1137, 1139
Quartz 0035, 0347, 0046Thomson 0060, 0041, 0202
Quasar 0035, 0162, 0002,0077, 0226, 1182Tisonic 0278Two 0618, 0636, 0739,1337, 1996
RadioShack 0035, 0162, 0037Sonsory Science 1153ZI Group 1972
Q445, 0047, 0240,0000, 0104, 0045,0067, 1037, 1182Sharo 0045, 0047, 0032,0000, 0057, 0065, 0848TMX 0240, 0000, 0265
TNIX 0037
Shintom 0059, 0240, 0000,0072, 0258Locom 0240
Radix 0037Fashion 0240, 0045, 0000,0043, 0209, 0047,0054, 0057, 0062,0213, 0212, 0366,1005, 1972, 1996
Randex 0037 Shogun 0240
RCA 0060, 0035, 0048,0240, 0045, 0000,0442, 0149, 0880,0761, 0760, 0232,0165, 0166, 0135,0077, 0065, 0058, 0054Siemens 0037, 01'04
Signature 0050, 0035, 0037,0048, 0000, 0149,0076, 0065, 0179Toson c 0278
Singer 0037, 0240, 0072Totevision 0037, 0240
Sonic Bue 0614, 0616, 1137Iouch 1972

Useful Remote Control Features

PVR

Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes
ABS 1972 HP 1972 Niveus Media 1972 Slack 93/12
Alienware 1972 Hughes Network0/39 Northgate 1972 Systemissystemax 1972
CyberPower 1972 Panasonic 0614, 0616 Tagar Systems1972
Del1972Humax0739Philips0618.0739Tivo0618, 0636, 0739, 1337
DirecTV0739Hush1972Pioneer1337Toshiba1008, 1972, 1996
Everfocus1346IBUYPOWER1972RCA0880Touch1972
Gateway1195, 1196, 1972Linksys1972ReplayTV0614.0616Vicowsonic1972
Go Video0614 Media Center PC1972 Samsung 0739 Voodoo 1972
Hewlett Packaro1972Microsoft1972Sonic Blue0614.0616ZT Group1972
Howard Commourors1972Mino1972Sony0636.1972

DVD

Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes
3D LAB0533, 0539CAVS1057Enterprise0591Kawasaki0790
Accurian1072, 1416, 1737Celestia1020Entivo0503, 0539Kenwood0490, 0534, 0692, 0737
Acoustic Solutions0130Centrex0612, 1004Enzer0110K.H0711, 0790, 1020, 1149
Adcom1094Centrics1577ESA1443Kosa0533
Afreey0898Cinea0857Firstline0631Konka0711, 0721
Aima0641CineVision0876, 0833, 0869Fisher0670Koss0651, 0769, 0898, 1061, 1423
Akai0295, 0705, 0770, 1089Citizen1005, 0893, 1277Tunali0675, 1394
Alba0572, 0777Clairtona0571Gateway1073, 1077, 1158, 1194Kroison1421
Alico0790 Coby0775, 0652, 1077, 0573, 0744, 0717, 1086, 1107, 1165, 1171, 1361GE0677, 0815, 0717Krell 1498
Allogric0669 Go Video1127130, 1443, 1304, 158, 1148, 1144, 1099, 1015, 1044, 0669, 0855, 0783, 0741, 0715Lafayette1369
Amphion Media Works0812, 1245Lardel0826
Craig0851Lasonic0677, 0798, 1173, 1747
AMW0872, 1245Creative0503, 0539Locson1533
Apex Digital0533, 0672, 0717, 0755, 0764, 0796, 0794, 1004, 1020, 1058, 1081, 1100Curus Malthes1081 Lenoxx
Cyberli Home 08'6, 0674, 1017, 1019, 1023, 1024, 1117, 1129, 1502, 1537Go Vision1071, 1072 LiteOnLG0551, 0741, 0601, 0869
GoldStar0741, 0801, 06691058, 1158, 1416, 1440, 1656
Arcam0732Cytron0705Goodmans0790Loewe0511, 0741
Arngo1023 Deewoo0754, 0705, 0770, 0833, 0869, 1169, 1172, 1234, 1242, 1441, 1443GPX0699, 0769 Logix0783
Aspire Digital0694, 1158, 1407Gradiente0490, 0657Magnason c0651, 0675
Asar1429, 1794, 1678, 1679Greenhill0717Magnavox0503, 0539, 0646, 0675, 1306
Audiologic0736Gruncig0539, 0705
Audiovox0717, 0790, 1041, 1071, 1072Dansa0770Harman/Kardon0682, 0762Valara0782, 1152
Jayok0872Hitachi0673, 0664Marantz0503, 0539, 0675
Awa0730Decca0770Heleni0672McIncosh1533, 1273, 1373
Axion1071, 1072Denon0490, 0639Humax1588Medion0651
B & K0555, 0662Donner0778Lo1345Mormorox0690, 0695, 0831, 1270
BBK1224Desay1407, 1455In ital0717Microsoft0522, 1708
Del Canto Design1571Diamond Vision1318Innovative Technology1542Minato0752
Blaspunkt0717Digitrex0672INOI1747Mintek0839, 0717
Blue Parade0571Digix1212nlegra0571, 0627Mitsubishi1521, 0521
Blue Sky0695, 0699Disney0675, 1270R20783MaxSonic1130, 1611
Brandt0651DIV Do0705Jalon1078Morn Isu1082
Brcksonic 0695, 1419 Dual 0675, 1068, 1085JBL0702 Mustex 0730
Bush0690Durabrand1127JMD0695Myiyad0894
California Audio Labs0490DVD20000521JSI1423NAD0591, 0692, 0741
Cambridge Audio1471Electronome1005JVC0558, 0625, 0867, 164, 1275, 1350, 1602Na ko0770
Cambridge Soundworks0690 Elta0690 Nakamichi1222
Cary Audio Design1477Emerson0501, 0615JWir1049, 1051, 1469, 1675NEC0785, 0869

Useful Remote Control Features

DVD

Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes
Nesa 0717 Presician 0675, 1072 Schwaiger 075 Tevior 0651
NeuNeo 0539 Primare 0566, 1467, 1618 Serson Science 1188 Theta Digital 0571
Nex: Base0296Princeton0674Sharp0630.0615, 0752, 1256Thomson0522, 0511
Nextloch1402Proceed0672Sharper mage1117Tvo1568
Nintaus1051Proscan0522Sherwood0633.0713, 1043, 1077Toshioka0503, 0573, 0539
Norten1003.0812, 1107Prosonic0699 Shinsonic0533.08390695.1154, 1538,
1265.1457Provision 0778 Sigma Designs06741808.1769
Orkyo0503.0627, 0792Owatar0651Slim Art0784Ixodex0799, 0800, 0503.0804
Opoo0575, 1224, 1525Radionette0741SM Ectoronic0690.0750Ln max0770
Optimus0571RadioShack0571Sonic Blue0573.0715, 0783,United0750
OpticoMedia Electronics0895 RCA0522, 0571.0117,0869, 1099Universum0591
Oritron06510790, 0522Sony0639.1533, 0864,Urban Concepts0503, 0539
Palsonic0579.0852Realistic05711017, 1038, 1063,LS Logic0839
Panasonic0503, 0430, 0571,REAL mag c 06741070, 1431, M52,1064, 1226
0637, 0703, 1013,1433, 1644,0790
1011, 1762Rooc 0752
Revoy0699Sungale1074, 1342, 1532Viata1509
Plico0690R o0669SVA0717.0860, 1105Vizio1064, 1226
Philips0503, 0539, 0546RJTech0118, 1360 Sylvans 065 Vocopro 1027, 1360
0875, 1267, 1354, 1846Rotel0623, 1178Symphoric0676, 1334Wesder0599
Prondtrend0699Rowa0825, 1004TAG McLaren0694Xoox0522.1108
PianoDisc 102/ Saba 0851 Tatung0770 Xwave1001
Pioneer0525, 0571, 0142,Sampo0696, 0752, 1501 Icac0571, 0717, 0692,Yamaha 0490, 0539, 0545,
0631, 0632, 1475,Samsung0490, 0573, 0744,0790, 06090497, 0817
1476, 15710199, 0620, 1044, 1075Technics0490, 0703 Yamakawa0672
Polarcid 1020, 106', 1066Sansui0695Technika0770Zenith0503.0591, 0741, 0869
Sanyc 0670, 0675, 0695,Technosonic0730 Zeus0784
Polk Audio03890873, 1334Techwood0692Zeese1263
Portland0770Schneider0783Terap n1031

DVD-R

Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes Brand Codes
Accuran1416Funa0675, 1334LiteOn1158, 1415, 1440Samsung0490
Apex Digita1056Gateway1073, 1158, 1194Magnavoc0648, 0675, 1506Sensory Science1156
Aspire Digital1168Sc Video0741, 1158, 1304, 1730Panasonic0490, 1010, 1011Sharp0615
Astar1489i o1345Philips0676Sony1053, 1069, 1070
Broksonic1419JVC1154, 1275Pioneer0631, 1475, 14761431, 1439, 1433
Cooy1386Kroiser1421Polarolo1080Sylvania0676
Cyber lome1129, 1502LG0741RCA0522Zenith0741

BD (HD-DVD)

Brand Codes Brand Codes BrandCodes
Fioneer2062.0142Samsung0'99Toshiba1769

LD

Brand Codes Brand Codes BrandCodes Brand Codes
Awa0203Marantz0064.0194Polk Audio0194Technics0204
Carver0064.0194,0323Mitsubishi0059.0247Quasar0204Theta Digital0194
Denon0059.0177,0241NAD0059Realistic0203Ioshiba0059
Disco Vision0023NEC0286Renaissance0203Victor0245
Funai0203Optimus0059Samsung0393Wards0039
Harman/Karcon0194Panasonic0204Sega0023Yamaha0217
Hilachi0020.0595Philios0064.0194Sharp0001
Magnavox0064.0194,0217,0241Pioneer0059.0025,0241.1224Sony0183.0201,0270

14 Useful Remote Control Features

Using the remote control unit to control other devices
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Useful Remote Control Features - 1

text_image TV INPUT 1 2 3 ANT HDMI 4 5 6 7 SCREEN IN SELECTOR DISPLAY RGB SAL-UNI/UNI COM-UNI MENU SAL-UNI TV GUIDE NO OF MENU DAY+ ENTER DAY- TIME CONTROL PAGE+ RETURN FANORATE CH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ON CH ON RETURN VOL CH ON RETURN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Mode switch (buttons operate at any position)

Receiver control buttons

When a Pioneer receiver is connected to the display, the receiver can be operated using buttons 1 to 3.

1. RECEIVER ⏻ (STANDBY/ON)

Turns the Pioneer receiver power on and off.

2. RECEIVER INPUT

Selects the input source connected to the Pioneer receiver.

3. RECEIVER VOL +/-

Adjusts the Pioneer receiver volume level. Press VOL + to increase the volume and VOL - to decrease it.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - RECEIVER VOL +/- - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - RECEIVER VOL +/- - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - RECEIVER VOL +/- - 3

Useful Remote Control Features

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Useful Remote Control Features - 1

text_image 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Mode switch (with "CBL/SAT" selected) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 CH RETURN VOL CH RETURN CH FAVORATE CH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 CH RETURN VOL CH RETURN CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORATE CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FAVORAT CH FIOR AT CH Return VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VOL VON TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TUN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TIN TAIN UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UNT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UMT UNT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUT A NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA NUTA BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT BOUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B OUT B IN M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O M S O C L I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I II III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII

CBL/SAT control buttons

When the Mode switch is set to CBL/SAT, the cable converter or satellite broadcast tuner connected to the display can be operated using the buttons shown below (3, 4, 5, 8 and 9 for cable converters and 1 to 7 for satellite tuners);

1. SAT MENU

Displays the satellite broadcasting menu screen.

2. ENTER,↑↓←→

ENTER: Activates the selected function.

↑/↓/↔: Selects items on the SAT GUIDE screen or SAT MENU screen.

3.0 to 9

Press a button (or buttons) that corresponds to the channel that you want to watch.

4. CH +/-

Selects a higher or lower channel.

5. SOURCE ⏻

Turns the equipment power on and off.

6. SAT GUIDE

Displays the satellite broadcasting guide screen.

7. RETURN

When the CBL/SAT menu is displayed, restores the immediately previous screen.

8. CH ENTER\*

Enters the selected channel with the direct channel selection buttons.

9. CH RETURN\*

Switches between the current channel and the channel you were watching immediately before.

* Some cable converter manufacturers do not preset CH ENTER and CH RETURN.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - CH RETURN\* - 1

Note

• CABLE and SAT cannot be selected at the same time.

14 Useful Remote Control Features

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Useful Remote Control Features - 1

text_image TV INPUT 1 2 3 ANT HDMI 4 5 6 7 SCREEN MUSIKIN DISPLAY AV PC SIZE SELECTING ON COLD TWO WITH TV MEN. GUIDE DW STOP RUN PAGE+ DAY + ON/ON PAGE- HDMI CONTENTS RETURN FOWRITE ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ON ON RETURN + VOL - ON OUTPUT ON OUTPUT 1 2 3 4 SOURCE STOP REC ? 5 6 7 MOBILE VCR SPLIT PRINT CONT. SPLIT SET MTR CONT. VCR START OFF ON Mode switch (with "VCR" selected)

VCR control buttons

When the Mode switch is set to VCR, VCRs connected to the display can be operated with the remote control unit.

  • Press the input selector button INPUT 1 to INPUT 7 that matches the input terminal number to which the VCR is connected, then the VCR can be operated using 1 to 8.
  • VCRs made by other manufacturers can also be operated using the remote control unit if the remote control signals of the devices have been preset. See page 78.

1. CH +/-

Selects the channel on the VCR.

2. ▶ (PLAY)

Selects playback.

3. (REW)

Rewinds the tape and allows picture search.

4. SOURCE ⏻

Turns the power of the VCR on and off.

5. II (PAUSE/ STILL)

Pauses playback and displays still pictures.

6. ▶▶ (FF)

Rapidly advances the tape and allows picture search.

7. ● (REC)

Starts recording.

8. ■ (STOP)

Stops tape transport.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - ■ (STOP) - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - ■ (STOP) - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - ■ (STOP) - 3

Useful Remote Control Features

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Useful Remote Control Features - 1

text_image TV INPUT 1 2 3 ANT HDMI 4 5 6 7 SCREEN WITH SWITCH DISPLAY RIDE SAT/USB MENU SAT/CDLE INFO COLD MENU TV GUIDE SATE MENU MENU QD/SP MENU DAY+ PAGE+ DAY+ RETURN FAMORATE CH 1 2 3 4 -5 6 7 8 9 0 OH CH RETURN + CH RETURN + VOL - 1 2 3 4 SOURCE STOP REC 5 6 7 8 9 10 Mode switch (with "DVD/ DVR" selected)

DVD/DVR control buttons

When the Mode switch is set to DVD/DVR, DVD players, DVD recorders or BD players connected to the display can be operated with the remote control unit.

  • When the input selector button having the same number as the input terminal connected to a DVD player, DVD recorder or a BD player is pressed, these players can be operated using 1 to 12.
  • DVD players, DVD recorders, BD players or HD-DVD players made by other manufacturers can also be operated using the remote control unit if the remote control signals of the devices have been preset. See page 78.

1. CH +/- (DVD recorder only)

Changes the channel of the tuner built into the DVD recorder.

2. ▶ (PLAY)

Selects playback.

Continue pressing to go backward. Pressing quickly once takes you to the start of the chapter currently playing. Each time you press it, you move back to the start of the previous chapter.

4. SOURCE ⏻

Turns the equipment power on and off.

5. II (PAUSE/STILL)

Pauses playback and displays still pictures.

6. DVD MENU

Displays the DVD menu.

7. DVD TOP MENU

Displays the DVD top menu.

8. ENTER,↑↓←→/

ENTER: Activates the selected function.

↑/↓/←/→: Selects items on the DVD MENU screen.

9. RETURN

When the DVD menu is displayed, restores the immediately previous screen.

10. A (BLUE), B (RED), C (GREEN), D (YELLOW) (BD only)

Controls the BD-J Application.

Continue pressing for fast forward. Pressing quickly once takes you to the start of the next chapter. Each time you press it, you move ahead to the start of the next chapter.

12. ● (REC) (DVD recorder only)

Starts recording.

13. ■ (STOP)

Stops playback. With some DVD players or DVD recorders, press twice to open the disc tray.

12, 13 STOP REC (DVD recorder only)

Press and hold ●, and then press ■ to stop recording. This operation applies to only Pioneer DVD recorders.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - 12, 13 STOP REC (DVD recorder only) - 1

Note

  • A DVD player, DVD recorder and a BD player cannot be selected at the same time.
  • For some LD players, the buttons on the remote control unit function as above. For the supported LD players, see the LD brands and codes on page 83.

Appendix

Chapter 15

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Solution
GENERAL

• No power. • is the power cord disconnected? (See page 25.)
• Has ◊ been turned on? (See page 27.)
• Check if you pressed TV ◊ on the remote control unit. (See page 27.)
If the indicator on the system lights up red, press TV ◊ on the remote control unit or STANDBY/ON on the plasma display.
• Power is suddenly turned off. • Is the sleep timer set? (See page 39.)
• Check the power control selling. (See page 58.)
• The system's internal temperature has increased. Clean the vents, or remove any blocking objects. (See page 16.)
• The system cannot be operated.• External influences such as voltage malfunction, static electricity etc., may cause improper operation. In this case, operate the system after first turning off the power of the plasma display, or unplugging the power cord and re-plugging it in after one to two minutes.
• Remote control unit does not operate.• Check if TV ◊ is off. Turn the button on when the POWER ON and STANDBY indicators are off.
• Is the Mode switch set correctly? Slice it to the TV position. (See page 15.)
• Are batteries inserted with connect polarity (+,-)? (See page 26.)
• Are batteries worn out? (Replace with new batteries.) (See page 26.)
• Operate the remote control unit while pointing it toward the remote control sensor on the plasma display. (See page 26.)
• Are you using it under strong or fluorescent lighting?
• Is a fluorescent light illuminating the remote control sensor?
• Check if any obstacles exist between the remote control unit and the remote control sensor.
• POWER ON indicator or STANDBY indicator is quickly flashing.• Internal protective circuits may have been activated. First turn the power off by removing the AC power cord from the power outlet, and then turn the power on again in after one minute or more. If the problem is not solved with this, contact the nearest Pioneer Authorized Independent Service Company, or the Customer Support Division (see back cover).
PICTURE/SOUND
• No image and audio is presented.• Check if the input source for video or PC has been unintentionally selected although you want to watch a TV channel. (See page 28.)
• Check if you have activated the Parental Control function. (See page 38.)
Enter a password to temporarily cancel the Parental Control function. (See page 42.)
• Check the cable connection with the antenna. (See page 24.)
• Check the cable connection with the other equipment. (See pages 64 to 69.)
• No picture. • Is connection to other components correct? (See pages 64 to 69.)
• Is a non-compatible PC signal being input? (See page 68.)
• Is picture adjustment correct? (See page 65.)
• Screen appears dark • Check if any obstacles exist in front of the Room Light Sensor. (See pages 13 and 63.)
• Audio is output but no image is presented.• Check if you have selected "Picture Off" for Energy Save. With this option selected, the screen is deactivated; only audio is output. To restore the screen display, press any button other than VOL +/- and MUTING. (See page 68.)
• Images are presented but no audio is cutout.• Check if you have selected the minimum volume. (See page 29.)
• Check if you have muted sound. (See page 29.)
• When using a video or PC input source, check that the audio terminals are also connected. (See pages 64 to 67 and 68.)
• Sound is reversed between the right and left.• Check if the speaker cable connections have been reversed between the right and left or if the speaker cable from either speaker has been disconnected (for PDP-0080HD only). (See page 19.)
• Sound is output from only a single speaker.• Has the balance been correctly adjusted? (See page 57.)
• Picture is cut off. • Is the image position correct? (See page 60.)
• Has the correct screen size been selected? (See page 62.)
• Strange color, light color, dark or color misalignment.• Adjust the picture tone. (See page 56.)
• Is the room too bright? The picture may look dark in a room that is too bright.

Appendix

Problem Possible Solution

After-image lag.After displaying a still image or a very bright image for a length of time, if the screen is then switched to a darker scene, the previous image may appear as an after-image.This can be rectified by playing a bright moving image for several minutes. However, displaying a still image for excessively long periods of time may cause permanent display celer cration.Display the "Video Pattern" screen to help reduce after image. (See page 63.)
Brightness and color tone on both sides differ from those in the center in 4:3 mode.If images in 4:3 mode or letterbox images are displayed for long periods or for shorter periods over several days, an after-image may remain due to burning. This is a characteristic of plasma displays.We recommend that you enjoy watching images in a full screen mode as much as possible. (See page 61.)We recommend you select "Auto" for "Brightness Sync." in the Side Mask setting. This adjusts the brightness of the gray side masks according to the brightness of the main image. (See page 62.)
HDMI Control
HDMI Control functions do not operate.Check if the connections are properly made between the plasma display and the device that supports the HDMI Control functions. (See page 75.)Check if you have entered the settings properly for "Setting the HDMI Control". (See page 76.)Check if the settings for the HDMI Control functions are effective on the connected device(s). For details, refer to the operation manual that came with the device.
No image and audio is presented.Check if the connections are properly made between the plasma display and the device that supports the the HDMI Control functions. (See page 75.)Check if you have entered the settings properly for "Setting the HDMI Control". (See page 78.)
No pictureCheck if the connections are properly made between the plasma display and the device that supports the HDMI Control functions. (See page 75.)Check if you have entered the settings properly for "Setting the HDMI Control". (See page 78.)
No soundCheck if the connections are properly made between the plasma display and the device that supports the HDMI Control functions. (See page 75.)Check if you have entered the settings properly for "Setting the HDMI Control". (See page 78.)Check if you have an HDMI controlled AV system connected to one HDMI terminal and the recorder or player connected to another HDMI terminal on the plasma display. When connected this way, audio out from the recorder/ player does not go through the plasma display SPDIF terminal resulting in no sound to the AV system. When using an AV system and recorder or player, be sure to connect the recorder or player to the AV system input terminal.
An error message "The device cannot be operated, Please check the connection," appears.Check if the connections are properly made between the plasma display and the device that supports the HDMI Control functions. (See page 75.)Check if you have entered the settings properly for "Setting the HDMI Control". (See page 78.)
OTHER
TV-Guide data cannot be obtained.If TV-Guide data cannot be obtained with ANTA selected for cable connection, select ANTB for over the arc In addition, try the TV-Guide setup again by performing the following procedure (see page 34):- Select "Antenna" for "Select service(s)" on Screen 3.- Select "ANT B IN" on Screen 4.
An external device connected to the USB port does not operate.Check if the device is connectable to the display. (See page 70.)Re Insert the USB cable. (See page 70.)For connection: use a USB cable shorter than 5 m. (See page 70.)Check if the USB cable is properly connected. (See page 70.)First turn the power off and then turn it on again in order to check if the external device works correctly.Check if the external device works correctly after the USB device was restarted.Check if the digital still camera is in the viewing mode.Refer to the instruction manual for the digital still camera.
Photo data stored in a digital still camera cannot be read through USB interface.Check if the device is connectable to the display. (See page 70.)Check if the digital still camera is turned on.
Panel sounds / noisesPanel generated sounds, examples: Fan motor noise, Electrical Circuit Humming / Glass Panel buzzing are normal operation of a phosphor-based matrix display.
Screen displays uneven brightness on the sides.Display content that completely fills the screen until unevenness is minimized. Some signals may require to change the AV mode setting. (See page 61.)

If the following error codes appear on the screen, check the corresponding items in the table.

Code Message Check

SD04 and SD11Powering off. Internal temperature too high. Check temperature around PDP.Check if the ambient temperature of the plasma display is high.
SD05 (PDP-5080HD)
Internal protection circuit turns power off. Is there a short in speaker cable? (PDP-4280HD)Check the speaker cable connections between the plasma display and the speakers.
Internal protection circuit turns power off.Contact the nearest Pioneer Authorized Independent Service Company, or the Customer Support Division. (See back cover.)

Appendix

This product in part uses "OpenSSL" software.

To the extent the OpenSSL software is being used, the following notification applies:

Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

  1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
  2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
  3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
  4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
  5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
  6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES: LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY. WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjn@cryptsoft.com).

Original SSLeay License

Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)

All rights reserved.

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryplsoff.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are ahered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Inash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

  1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
  2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
  3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related (-).
  4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING. BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Original SSLeay License - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Original SSLeay License - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Original SSLeay License - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Original SSLeay License - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Original SSLeay License - 5

Appendix

Linux Source Notice

The Pioneer Plasma Television is powered by utilizing the Linux operating system. The machine readable copy of the corresponding source code is available for the cost of distribution. To obtain a copy, please visit

http://www.pioneerelectronics.com/ for more information.

GNU General Public License

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston. MA 02111-1307. USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbalim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

GNU General Public License

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION

  1. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.

  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

  1. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.

b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.

c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - GNU General Public License - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - GNU General Public License - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - GNU General Public License - 3

15 Appendix

(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

  1. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:

a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

  1. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.

However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

  1. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.

  2. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.

  3. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

  1. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 5

Appendix

  1. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

  1. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

  1. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU, SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
  2. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.

To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

Copyright (C) yyyy name of author

This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:

Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author

Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type 'show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type 'show c' for details.

The hypothetical commands 'show w' and 'show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than 'show w' and 'show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items- whatever suits your program.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program 'Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.

signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989

Ty Coon. President of Vice

This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs - 3

Appendix

GNU Lesser General Public License

Version 2.1, February 1999

Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.

To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.

Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder.

Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.

Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.

When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.

We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.

For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library.

A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.

In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.

Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Preamble - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Preamble - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Preamble - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Preamble - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Preamble - 5

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Preamble - 6

Appendix

GNU Lesser General Public License

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING. DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION

  1. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".

A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.

The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)

"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.

  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

  1. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library.

b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.

c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.

d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.

(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

  1. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.

Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.

  1. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.

If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

  1. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.

Appendix

When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.

If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)

Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.

  1. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.

You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License.

Also, you must do one of these things:

a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)

b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.

c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.

d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.

e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.

For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.

  1. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:

a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.

b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.

  1. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

  2. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.

  3. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.

  4. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all.

For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 5

Appendix

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

  1. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
  2. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
  3. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

  1. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING. REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
  2. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries

If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).

To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

Copyright (C) year name of author

This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library: if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library 'Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.

signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990

Ty Coon. President of Vice

That's all there is to ill

Appendix

Specifications

Item50" plasma display model: PDP-5080HD42" plasma display model: PDP-4280HD
Number of pixels 1365 x 768 pixels '024 x 768 pixels
Audio Amplifier17 W + 17 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 6 Ω)17 W + 17 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 6 Ω)
Speakers Woofer: 4.8 cm x 13 cm cone typeTweeter: 2.5 cm semidome typeWoofer: 4.5 cm x 13 cm cone typeTweeter: 2.5 cm semidome type
Surround System SRS FOCUS/SRS/SRS TruBass SRS FOCUS/SRS/SRS TruBass
Power Requirement: 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 3/1 W (23 W Standby)120 V AC, 60 Hz, 315 W (23 W Standby)
WeightMain unit: 34.8 kg (76.7 lbs.)Stand: 2.2 kg (4.9 lbs.) (including bolts)Speaker system: 3.3 kg (7.28 lbs.) (including cables, mounting fittings and screws)Total: 40.3 kg (88.8 lbs.)Main unit: 29.9 kg (65.9 lbs.)Stand: 1.6 kg (3.6 lbs.) (including bolts)Total: 31.6 kg (69.7 lbs.)
Reception System (Digital)ATSC Digital TV system
Circuit typeBVSS/64QAM/26EQAM/QPSK demodulation
TunerVHF/UHFVHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69
CATVCh. 2 to 135
Audio formatDolby Digital
Reception System (Analog)American TV standard NTSC system
Circuit typeVideo signal detection PLL full synchronous detection, PLL digital Synthesizer system
TunerVHF/UHFVHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69
CATVANT/CABLE A IN Ch. 1 to 135 ANT B IN Ch. 1 to 125
Audio multiplexBTSC system
TerminalsRearANT/CABLE A IN75 Ω UNBAL, F Type for DTV/VHF/UHF/CATV in
ANT B IN75 Ω UNBAL, F Type for VHF/UHF/CATV in
INPUT 1S-VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in
INPUT 2COMPONENT VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in
INPUT 4HDMI in*, AUDIO in
PC INPUTAnalog RGB in, AUDIO in
INPUT 5HDMI in*, AUDIO in
INPUT 6HDMI in*
INPUT 7HDMI in*
AUDIO OUTAUDIO cut (Fixed)
DIGITAL OUTOptical
CONTROL OUT1
SPEAKERS6 Ω to 16 Ω-
SUB WOOFERVariable
CableCARD Point of Deployment
SideINPUT 3COMPONENT VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in
PHONES16 Ω to 32 Ω recommended
USBUSB in**
On screen display languagesEnglish/French/Spanish

* This conforms to HDMI1.3 and HDCP1.1.

HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a digital interface that handles both video and audio using a single cable.

HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a technology used to protect copyrighted digital contents that use the Digital Visual Interface (DVI).

** This conforms to USB 1.1 and 2.0.

- Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Appendix

Dimensions

PDP-5080HD

Unit: mm (inch)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 1

text_image 1224 (48-3/16) 717 (28.7/32) 78 (3-1/32) 550 (21-21/32) 847.5 (33-3/8) 115 (4-1/2) 300 (11-13/16)

PDP-4280HD

Unit: mm (inch)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 2

text_image 1040 (40-15/16) 679 (26-3/4) 550 (21-21/32) 719 (28-5/16) 237 (9-11/32) 115 (4-1/2)

15

Appendix

Trademarks

  • In the United States, TV Guide and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. In Canada, TV Guide is a registered mark of Transcontinental, Inc. and is used under license by Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.
    • is a remark of SRS Labs, Inc.
  • WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
  • Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
    • HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
  • This product includes FontAvenue® fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.
  • DDC is a registered trademark of Video Electronics Standards Association.
    • CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.
  • This software is based in part on the work of the independent JPEG Group.
    • The names of the companies or institutions are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies or institutions.

License

• The TV Guide On Screen system is manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates.

Patent

- The TV Guide On Screen system is protected by one or more of the following United States patents 4,908,713; 6,498,895; 6,850,693; 6,396,546; 5,940,073; 6,239,794 to Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries.

Disclaimer Notice

- Gemstar TV Guide International Inc. and/or its related affiliates are not in any way liable for the accuracy or availability of the program schedule information or other data in the TV Guide On Screen system and cannot guarantee service availability in your area. In no event shall Gemstar TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates be liable for any damages in connection with the accuracy or availability of the program schedule information or other data in the TV Guide On Screen system.

Important Notice about software upgrade from Pioneer

Attention Pioneer PDP Owners:

Thank you for purchasing a Pioneer Digital Cable Ready (DCR) compatible Plasma TV.

You have purchased the most advanced product of its kind available today.

However, as technology advances, DCR systems may continue to evolve. To maintain compatibility with DCR systems and features, your Plasma TV may benefit from, or require software upgrades.

As part of our commitment to our customers, Pioneer will send you upgrade software and instructions as needed to keep your DCR compatible Plasma TV up to date with this technology.

Please take the time to register your DCR compatible Plasma TV at

www.pioneerelectronics.com

This registration enables us to keep you up to date on changes that may occur.

Thank you very much.

Note:

DCR function will work only for USA.

DCR function will not work in Canada.

Published by Pioneer Corporation.

Copyright © 2007 Pioneer Corporation.

All rights reserved.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note: - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note: - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note: - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note: - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note: - 5

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note: - 6

PDP5080HD.book Page 101 Monday, April 9, 2007 7:49 PM

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Note: - 7

Appendix

15

English

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Appendix - 5

IMPORTANT

PIONEER PDP5080HD - IMPORTANT - 1

URL: http://www.pioneerelectronics.com

signal (source AV uniquement) .....58

natural_image Line drawing showing two views of a door handle with hand placement and foot marking (no text or symbols)

(PDP-4280HD)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - IMPORTANT - 2

natural_image Illustration of a hand inserting a component into a vehicle compartment (no text or symbols visible)

Attention

natural_image Line drawing of a flat-screen monitor with a slide and paper holder, showing no text or symbols
natural_image Line drawing of a flat-screen monitor with two side panels and directional arrows indicating assembly or movement (no text or symbols)
natural_image Diagram showing a mechanical component being inserted into a rectangular housing, with no visible text or symbols.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Attention - 1

Remarque

text_image Technical diagram of a computer monitor rear panel with labeled ports and connection points

pour PDP-4280HD
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Remarque - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an inset close-up view showing a circular feature (no text or symbols)
natural_image Illustration of a battery pack with two cylindrical batteries and a tray (no text or symbols)

Précautions relatives aux piles

text_image NPLIT VOLUME CHANNEL + INPUT ENTER UP DOWN VOLUME +/-

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Précautions relatives aux piles - 1

text_image 0 CH ENTER + CH RETURN + VOL - CH - MUTING
text_image SOURCE STOP REQ RECEIVER VOL INPUT - + SPLIT FREEZE SWAP SHIFT EDIT MTS CBL VCR /SAT TV -1/200V -1/200V -1/200V
text_image SOURCE STOP REC RECEIVER VOL INPUT - + SPLIT FREEZE SWAP SHIFT EDIT MTS CB VCR /BAI DVD TV DIR
natural_image Two black-and-white photos: one showing a baseball pitcher in action, the other showing a sailboat on water with hills in the background (no visible text or symbols)

Image dans l'image

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Précautions relatives aux piles - 2

natural_image Black-and-white action photo of a baseball pitcher in mid-swing, with spectators and barriers in the background (no visible text or symbols)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Précautions relatives aux piles - 3

text_image TV INPUT 1 2 3 ANT HDMI 4 5 6 7 SCREEN AI GUECTION DISPLAY PC SIZE SAT/DIR MENU VOL SAT/DIR TV OUTSIDE + OR RETIRE CH - VOL + OR MUTING - SOURCE - STOP REC - I II ● RECEIVER VOL. INPUT - + SPLIT FREEZE SWAP SHIFT EXT MTS /SAT KOR TV - L/CNR
natural_image Sequence of four grayscale images showing a person in motion, with no visible text or symbols.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Précautions relatives aux piles - 4

natural_image Two black-and-white photos showing a baseball pitcher on the field and a sailboat on the beach, with no visible text or symbols.
natural_image Two black-and-white action photos showing a person in motion on a field, with no visible text or symbols.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Précautions relatives aux piles - 5

natural_image Two black-and-white photos showing a badminton match in progress, with no visible text or symbols.
natural_image Black-and-white action photo of baseball players competing on a field, no visible text or symbols

Image normale Image fixe

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Précautions relatives aux piles - 6

text_image SOURCE R-TOP REC RECEIVER VOL INPUT + SPLIT FREEZE SWAP SHIFT EDIT MTS CBL VBR KCN /SAT DVD TV /DWR
text_image TV GUIDE WELCOME! TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide Built-in to this TV! ► 8 days of listings ► Powerful show searches ► One-touch recordings ► Subscription free TV made easy. Just press OK on your remote to begin! START ►

Écran de rappel

text_image TV GUIDE ON Screen interactive program guide Built-in to this TV! • 8 days of listings • Powerful show searches • Subscription free Highlight an option and press OK on your remote. Start setup Remind me to set up later Don't remind me again

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Écran de rappel - 1

Remarque

text_image TV GOVE Identifying Your Location For help press INFO On the following screen, you will be asked to select the appropriate item(s) from a list. Use your TV remote control arrow keys and the OK key to take you through the setup steps. Press the INFO key whenever you would like details. Which country is your TV located in? ✓ USA Canada Next
text_image TV ONLINE Identifying Your Location For help press INFO Please enter the 5-digit ZIP Code where your TV is located: 0 1 7 3 0 Next + Back
text_image TV Guide Selecting your services For help press INFO Please select which service(s) you would like your TV Guide On Screen™ to support (check all that apply): Antenna ✓ Cable without a Cable Box Next + Back
text_image TV CABLE Configuring for cable For help press INFO Please select on which input(s) you have connected your cable. Check all that apply (inputs that can collect TV Guide On Screen information are marked with an asterisk): ✓ ANT/CABLE A IN* ANT B IN* Next + Back

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Remarque - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Remarque - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Remarque - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Remarque - 4

PDP5080HD_Fre book Page 35 Monday, April 9, 2007 7:58 PM

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Remarque - 5

text_image You have entered the following TV Guide On Screen system settings. If any setting is marked INCOMPLETE, you will not be able to use that feature until you complete that portion of TV Guide On Screen system setup. ZIP Code — 01730 (USA) Cable on "AMT/CABLE A IN" Are the above settings correct? ✓ Yes, continue setup process No, repeat setup process Next + Back

Écran 6: Félicitations
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Remarque - 6

text_image TV GUIDE Helpful Information Congratulations on your TV Guide On Screen setup! Within 24 hours after your TV is powered OFF, you should begin to get listings. Press TV GUIDE on your remote: • If listings are not yet available, you'll see a TV Guide Setup Progress Screen. • If listings are available, you'll see a listings grid. (Note: it may take up to 5 days to get the full 5 days of listings.) To make sure you get the latest daily listings updates, remember: • TV – OFF And don't forget to update your TV Guide On Screen Setup if you: • Move to a new ZIP Code • change a service • add or remove a device Just press TV GUIDE and choose the "Change system settings" option. More information is available at www.tvges.com. Next + Back

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Remarque - 7

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Remarque - 8

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Remarque - 9

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Remarque - 10

08 Menu principal (HOME MENU)

Chapitre 8

text_image Pre-Selection Auto Cable Antenna 2.0 4.0 6.0 Verlas Commensor is channels Annulier Home Menu Quality
text_image SvlographicArt A Pre-selection auto Cable Art A Pre-selection auto • Cable Cable Verilog patienter ... Angler Home Menu Outer
text_image Pulsure to signal Act. A Pulsure to signal Maximum : 100 Actuallement : 100 Home Menu Cutter
text_image Control panel Classment MPAA Classment MPAA H4 PG Computes MPAA (includes H4, B, PG, P3-13, R, NC-17) Home Menor Quitter
text_image Control parents Closement File 19-none 19-V 19-V 19-V 19-S 19-P6 Categories file blockers Home Menu Cutter
text_image Contrise current Angles current/losses Angles current/losses C C8+ Recurrent angle current/loss Home Menu: Quitter
text_image Contra le prontal Target condensitases Target condensitases + E E S anse Cased in the conduce E is done, to do so, 15 d###, 18 d#+ Home Menu Outer
text_image Start April For the folder is clear and the directory is available in Home Menu Outlet
text_image Risings Risings auto/man Done or hours 3 4 3.77/04 11:58pm 5 6 Hours actuals: 11:58 pm POT Lunch: 05/17/04 Home Menu Outer
text_image 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 still unsolved Premiere Tends 10% = TMN SCHEDULE LPG MATCH SETUP CSI: Crime Scene Investigation "Daddy/Little GH" Drama A professional motorcycle. I can be stacked to cloth while working on his bike in a garage attached to a house. He has shared with two women he recently met. The investigation reveals that the victim was about to leave them with the younger of the two women. Director: Terrence (Panda, TV4) (Violence), Sexual Situation (C) today SPG Sarred Balance CSI: Crime Scene Investigation question of Godo CHS American Invictor American Inventory FOX True/Thr Shelly True O.C. FOX True/Thr Shelly True O.C. SAY Will & Grace: My Goodnight Grace Will & Grace SpongeBob Monster! Full House Walt Mayoff To Be Announced

1 Logo TV GUIDE

text_image CIS: Crime Scene Investigation "Daddy's Little Girl" (Drama) A professional monotross room is valued to death while working on the life in a garage attached to a house he shows that two women have been met. The investigation needs that Far Van's was about to leave towns with the younger of the two women. Director: Terrence O'Hara, TV 14 (Violence, Sexual Situations) [10] SCHOOL CBS CIS FOX American Investor FOX Fox Saw Wish & Grace, Jay Goodnight Grace spongego Nikka Payoff to be announced
text_image CST: Crime Scene Investigation "Deody's Little Girl" (Drama) A professional motorcycle roar is recovered to death while working on the life in a gasbag attached to a house he shows with two women nearly met. The investigation reveals that the vehicle was about to leave town with the younger of the two women. Director: Terrence O'Hara. TV 14 (Violence, Sexual Situption) / 13 SODAY 12 PERS SOPES 12 CTS FOX 12 PRINCE 12 FIRE 12 FOX 12 LIFE 12 WELI & Grace: Joy: Overnight Grace SPRINGER 12 SPOCK 12 HAVA: Playful: You Announced QUANTERT OUT 12 CST: Crime Scene Investigation CST: Crime Scene Investigation American Investor American Investor Track No Show The O.C. Track No Show Tire O.C. WIN & Grace: Joy: Overnight Grace Springingness: Receptor Full House
text_image CIT: Crime Scene Investigation "Daddy's Little Girl" (Original A professional motorcycle race is viewed to death while working on his life in a garage attached to a house. He shows how women are merely met. The investigation needs that he will be about to leave town with the younger of the two women. Director: Terrence O'China, TV 14 (Violence, Sexual Situations) (T) TODAY 1:00PM 2:00PM 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM 9:00PM 10:00PM 11:00PM 12:00PM 13:00PM 14:00PM 15:00PM 16:00PM 17:00PM 18:00PM 19:00PM 20:00PM 21:00PM 22:00PM 23:00PM 24:00PM 25:00PM 26:00PM 27:00PM 28:00PM 29:00PM 30:00PM 31:00PM 32:00PM 33:00PM 34:00PM 35:00PM 36:00PM 37:00PM 38:00PM 39:00PM 40:00PM 41:00PM 42:00PM 43:00PM 44:00PM 45:00PM 46:00PM 47:00PM 48:00PM 49:00PM 50:00PM 51:00PM 52:00PM 53:00PM 54:00PM 55:00PM 56:00PM 57:00PM 58:00PM 59:00PM 60:00PM 61:00PM 62:00PM 63:00PM 64:00PM 65:00PM 66:00PM 67:00PM 68:00PM 69:00PM 70:00PM 71:00PM 72:00PM 73:00PM 74:00PM 75:00PM 76:00PM 77:00PM 78:00PM 79:00PM 80:00PM 81:00PM 82:00PM 83:00PM 84:00PM 85:00PM 86:00PM 87:00PM 88:00PM 89:00PM 90:00PM 91:00PM 92:00PM 93:00PM 94:00PM 95:00PM 96:00PM 97:00PM 98:00PM 99:00PM 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Logo TV GUIDE - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Logo TV GUIDE - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Logo TV GUIDE - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Logo TV GUIDE - 4

text_image TV SCHEDULE MATCH SET CIT: Crime Some Investigation "Daddy's Little Girl" (Overall) A professional motorcycle, took place to death while working on his life in a garage attached to a house. It should have two women very much. The investigation reveals that the votes were about to leave town with the younger of the two women. Director: Terrorer Obers, TV4 (Science, Sexual Situations) TODAY 10PM 3.8PM 4.8PM Special Issue CIT: Crime Scene Investigation CIT: Crime Street American Investor American Investor FOX: True: 200 Show The G.C. FOX: True: 200 Show The G.C. Soul Will & Grace, Say Gooding or Grace Will & Grace Spongebox! Koneel Full House
text_image REMINDER CONFLICT! Auto-tuning "Law & Order" will override the recording for "Friends". auto-tune anyway remind, no auto-tune don't set this reminder
text_image SCHEDULE LIST NET SEARCH SETUP First shows alphabetically, by categories (Including MDYs) and by keywords A thin appears for updated keyword info Move the list to choose search type MOVES INCOME CHILDREN WI Outdoor Baseball Sitting Basketball Sporting Boiling Sitting Boiling Soccer Football Tennis Gout Wrestling Hockey Other
text_image Press OK for shows matching category, then move ⬆️ to highlight show and press OK to watch if on now or Menu for episode options Sundays B: on The World Network ALPHABETICAL MOVCS SPORTS Action Myristics Comedy Science Fiction Documentary War Shrama Western Fantasy Other All
text_image SCHEDULE CONTENTS MESSAGE ETUP Local Matters Wednesday 2000 or FLN That's So Raven "If Only Had a Job" Raven tries to make attempts to her died for getting him tired. Raven, TVG n! MONDS CHINESE EDUCATIONAL CHILDLY ALL Double Date 2000 That's So Raven Tatawanah Super Rabbit Monkey Term hyperfisher Double Date 2000 Raven WITCH Finders Meiers
text_image AVRIGATION Movie Action 1985: 2000 Movie Title Armagedon Thru 100pm Thunderbox Thru 100pm Main Goals Thru 100pm Under Siege 2: Dark Territory Ft 1300pm Under Killer Ft 1300pm Defence Ft 1300pm Over Deadly Ground Ft 1300pm
text_image Find shows, actors, direction and descriptions based on a word you enter Press OK to start a new search or move + to choose an existing keyword HOT's KEYWORK ALPHARCTICAL Sundays Dm and The New Network
text_image TV SCHEDULES OPTIONS STARTS STOP Find shows, actions, directions and descriptions based on word you enter! Press OK to start a new search or move ▲ to choose an existing keyword Keyword Options go to Service for with by keyword new search done come! HOTY KEYWORD ALPHABETICAL
text_image Find shows, actions, directors and descriptions based on a word you enter from OK to start a new search or move + to choose an existing keyword
text_image Big Comedy 1985 ★★★★ A little wish to be an adult is granted by a mechanical wizard at a carnival. Director, Perry Marshall. TV 14 (Grenari Situations, Strong Language, Kuggestive Dialogue) USB Episode Options on to service Box watch here and session game HDTV KENSORS ALPHARICAL Big Big Big 12 Showcase Big Box Manila II Big Black Comedy Show Big Break All Great Challenge Big Break All Always
text_image TV SCHEDULE LISTERS SMRAGE STUP Move to choose a letter for your search still unsolved K L M N O P X Y Z M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M N U V W X Y Z X Y Z

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Logo TV GUIDE - 5

10

text_image AMRAGEDITION (Action 1918) ★ A massive asteroid is on a collection course with Earth Director: Michael Bay, PG13 (Adult Themes, Strong Language, Violence) 7.000 MOVATL ACTION AVOCATY Armagedition Thunderball Main Grass Under Stage 2: Dark Territory On-Stop After Defence On-Deadly Ground
text_image shows for Remind are listed here Move 4 to access To Do and press Menu for options. Still unsolved Sistered Balance Blue Stream SportsCenter Home Racing Tues: $18 £20pm UI Tues: $18 £10pm UI Tues: $19 £10pm UI Tues: $19 £20pm UI
text_image Home Racing: 88 Home Racing Friday 3/19 5:00pm 12 Second Horizon Thursday 3/15 8:00pm 14 SportCenter Friday 3:00 12:00pm 24
text_image SCHEDULE LISTING SEARCH Customer your settings, defaults and channel lineup - and check listings updates just move 4 to highlight your choice, or press Menu to Change Video Window status SETUP Change system settings Change channel display Change default options Display setup program
text_image Press Ok to view or update any info entered during initial Guide setup, or to select a different channel lineup Sundays Box on The United Network SOUP Change system settings Change channel display Change default options Display setup progress
text_image You have entered the following TV Guide On Screen system settings. If any setting is marked INCOMPLETE, you will not be able to use that feature until you complete that portion of TV Guide On Screen system setup. 2M Code — CYTSO USA Cable on "AMTCABLE 5 IN" Are the above settings correct? Yes, everything is correct Yes, but my channel lineup is incorrect No, repeat setup process
text_image Press OK to access Channel Editor, their change an option directly or screen or press Mono to access all options STOP Change system settings Change channel display Change default options Drawing whole program
text_image Press OK to set this channel to on off, or auto-hide, or press Men for more options Legal Matters Wednesday 20:00 am TLR CHANNEL EDITOR ON FREE W3B- Cable 2 OFF FREE W3B- Cable 5 ON FREE W3B- Cable 5 FOX FREE W3B- Cable 5 FOX FREE W3B- Cable 61 OFF FREE W3B- Cable 7 ON FREE W3B- Cable 8 ON FREE W3B- Cable
text_image TV ON SCHEDULE LISTERS SEARCH HELP Move → to change the status of the channel in your listing grid and search results. Set the channel to use off or auto-hold/channel only appears when show info is available. Channel Editor 1 ON 2 ON 3 ON 4 ON 5 ON 6 ON 7 ON 8 ON 9 ON 10 ON 11 ON 12 ON 13 ON 14 ON 15 ON 16 ON 17 ON 18 ON 19 ON 20 ON 21 ON 22 ON 23 ON 24 ON 25 ON 26 ON 27 ON 28 ON 29 ON 30 ON 31 ON 32 ON 33 ON 34 ON 35 ON 36 ON 37 ON 38 ON 39 ON 40 ON 41 ON 42 ON 43 ON 44 ON 45 ON 46 ON 47 ON 48 ON 49 ON 50 ON 51 ON 52 ON 53 ON 54 ON 55 ON 56 ON 57 ON 58 ON 59 ON 60 ON 61 ON 62 ON 63 ON 64 ON 65 ON 66 ON 67 ON 68 ON 69 ON 70 ON 71 ON 72 ON 73 ON 74 ON 75 ON 76 ON 77 ON 78 ON 79 ON 80 ON 81 ON 82 ON 83 ON 84 ON 85 ON 86 ON 87 ON 88 ON 89 ON 90 ON 91 ON 92 ON 93 ON 94 ON 95 ON 96 ON 97 ON 98 ON 99 ON
text_image Press OK to verify the status of various Guide setup functions SETUP Change system settings Change channel display Change default options Display setup progress Sundays Box on the Home Network

PIONEER PDP5080HD - 10 - 1

text_image The TV Guide On Screen System obtains channel and program information when your unit a turned off -- once initial setup is complete, this section will display the time for the next information update. TV Guide On Screen Setup Progress STEP STATUS Search for time Done 5/18.8 Steps Search for TV stations with TV Guide data Search for channel group Done Next Holdings Transition None scheduled

PIONEER PDP5080HD - 10 - 2

Commande la lecture.

www.pioneerelectronics.com

Publication de Pioneer Corporation.

© 2007 Pioneer Corporation.

PDP5080HD_Fre.book Page 93 Monday, April 9, 2007 7:58 PM

PIONEER PDP5080HD - www.pioneerelectronics.com - 1

Annexe

15

Français

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Annexe - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Annexe - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Annexe - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Annexe - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Annexe - 5

IMPORTANTE

PIONEER PDP5080HD - IMPORTANTE - 1

URL: http://www.pioneerelectronics.com

natural_image Two bundles of cables tied with ropes, labeled 'Cables de altavoz × 2' (no additional text or symbols)
natural_image Illustration showing hand positioning and safety symbols on a device (no text or labels)

(PDP-4280HD)
PIONEER PDP5080HD - IMPORTANTE - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a hand inserting a component into a vehicle compartment (no text or symbols)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - IMPORTANTE - 3

Precaución

natural_image Line drawing of a flat-screen monitor mounted on a stand with paper sheets and arrows indicating orientation (no text or symbols)
natural_image Line drawing of a flat-screen monitor with two side panels and directional arrows indicating assembly or movement (no text or symbols)
natural_image Diagram showing a mechanical component being inserted into a rectangular plate, with no visible text or symbols.

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Precaución - 1

Nota

text_image Technical diagram of a computer chassis with labeled components and directional arrows indicating assembly or movement.

para PDP-4280HD
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Nota - 1

text_image Technical diagram of a device rear panel with labeled components and an inset circular detail showing a component with dimension 'C'.
natural_image Illustration of a battery pack with two cylindrical cells and a rectangular base (no text or symbols)
text_image SOURCE STOP REC RECOVER VOL INPUT - + SPLIT FREEZE SWAP SHIFT EDIT MTS CBL VCR /SAT DVD TV -/0VR
text_image SOURCE STOP REC RECEIVER VOL INPUT + SPLIT FREEZE SWAP SHIFT EDIT M15 CB VOR /AT DVD TV /DR
natural_image Two black-and-white photos: one showing baseball players in action, the other a sunset over water with a sailboat (no visible text or symbols)

Imagen-en-imagen

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Nota - 2

natural_image Black-and-white photo of a baseball pitcher in action on the field, with spectators and a small inset showing a close-up of the pitcher's body (no visible text or symbols)

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Nota - 3

text_image TV INPUT 1 2 3 ANT HDMI 4 5 6 7 SCREEN AI GUECTION DISPLAY PC SIZE SAT GUIDE VOL + OR RETAIN CH - OR MUTING VOL - - SOURCE - STOP REC - + II ● RECEIVER VOL + INPUT - SPLIT FREEZE SWAP SHIFT EDIT MTS OS /SAT HCI +/-/SAT TV - +/-/SAT
natural_image Sequence of four black-and-white photos showing a person in motion, with no visible text or symbols.
natural_image Four-panel sequence showing a baseball pitcher in action, with arrows indicating movement direction (no text or symbols)
text_image TV GUIDE On Screen interactive program guide Built-in to this TV! ► 8 days of listings ► Powerful show searches ► One-touch recordings ► Subscription free TV made easy. Just press OK on your remote to begin! START ►

Pantalla de aviso

text_image TV GUIDE ON Screen interactive program guide Built-in to this TV! • 8 days of Listings • Powerful show searches • Subscription free Highlight an option and press OK on your remote. Start setup Remind me to set up later Don't remind me again

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Pantalla de aviso - 1

Nota

text_image TV GOVE Identifying Your Location For help press INFO On the following screens, you will be asked to select the appropriate item(s) from a list. Use your TV remote control arrow keys and the OK key to take you through the setup steps. Press the HBO key whenever you would like details. Which country is your TV located in? ✓ USA Canada Next
text_image TV ONLINE Identifying Your Location For help press INFO Please enter the 5-digit ZIP Code where your TV is located: 0 1 7 3 0 Next + Back
text_image TV GUIDE Selecting your services For help press INFO Please select which service(s) you would like your TV Guide On Screen™ to support (check all that apply): Antenna ✓ Cable without a Cable Box Next + Back
text_image TV CABLE Configuring for cable For help press INFO Please select on which input(s) you have connected your cable. Check all that apply (inputs that can collect TV Guide On Screen information are marked with an asterisk): ✓ ANT/CABLE A IN* ANT B IN* Next Back

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Nota - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Nota - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Nota - 3

PDP5080HD Spa.book Page 35 Monday, April 9, 2007 8:05 PM

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Nota - 4

text_image You have entered the following TV Guide On Screen system settings. If any setting is marked INCOMPLETE, you will not be able to use that feature until you complete that portion of TV Guide On Screen system setup. ZIP Code — 01730 (USA) Cable on "AMTICABLE A IN" Are the above settings correct? ✓ Yes, continue setup process No, repeat setup process Next + Back

Pantalla 6: Congratulaciones
PIONEER PDP5080HD - Nota - 5

text_image TV GUIDE Helpful Information Congratulations on your TV Guide On Screen setup! Within 24 hours after your TV is powered OFF, you should begin to get listings. Press TV GUIDE on your remote: • If listings are not yet available, you'll see a TV Guide Setup Progress Screen. • If listings are available, you'll see a listings grid. (Note: it may take up to 5 days to get the full 5 days of listings.) To make sure you get the latest daily listings updates, remember: • TV - OFF And don't forget to update your TV Guide On Screen Setup if you: • Move to a new ZIP Code • Change a service • add or remove a device Just press TV GUIDE and choose the "Change system settings" option. More information is available at www.tvges.com. Next + Back

Español

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Nota - 6

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Nota - 7

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Nota - 8

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Nota - 9

Capítulo 8

EI MENÚ PRINCIPAL

Resumen del MENÚ PRINCIPAL

text_image Control Familiar Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive Clive
text_image Control Family Classifications MPAs Classifications MPAs MPA PG Classifications MPAs Bispieridas MPA, B, PC, PS-13, B, NC-7 Home Menu Sahr
text_image Control Familiar Status Augusto Augusto is classified as regularized by 12 months Home Menu Salt
text_image Sub-Titles Status Accessing Escape in Music Home Menu Salt

Ítem Descripción

text_image 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CSE Crime Scene Investigation "Daddy Little Girl" (Drama) A professional motorcycle. rater is subtled to clash while working on his bike in a garage attached to a house. he shared with two women he recently met. The investigation reveals that the victim was about to leave them with the younger of the two women. Director: Terrence (Phase. TV 14 (Violence, Secret Situation)) N today 10PM Sared Balance 1:0PM Question or Goal... CBS CSE Crime Scene Investigation CBS Crime Street American Impulse American Inventory FOX Trac TV Show Tec O.C. FOX Trac TV Show Tec O.C. 1PM W/N & Graser: Say Goodnight Grace Wall & Grace 1PM Suggested Honeywell Full House New Payoff To Be Announced Premiere light 10/Hz = 1.5mJ 11 12 13

1 Logotipo TV GUIDE

text_image TV COS: Crime Scene Investigation "Daddy Little Girl" (Drama) & professional memoirs was answered to the week, who was wrong on the bike in a parrot linked to those be shared with two women he recently met. The investigation reveals that the victim was about to leave town with the younger of the two women. Director: Terrence O'Hara, TV 14 (Violence, Serious Situations) [7] SODAY PRES SICU FOX American Investor FOX Fox Saw Premieres Longue 10/14 or LLM SODAY SICU FOX American Investor FOX Fox Saw Still & Grace's Day Goodnight Grace Spongebox Spongebox Newspaper Newspaper/TO are announced
text_image Citi Crime Scene Investigation "Deody's Little Girl" (Drama) A professional motorcycle rider is resumed to death while working on his life in a garage attached to a house. He shows with two women temporarily met. The investigation reveals that the victim was about to leave town with the younger of the two women. Director: Terrestor O'Hara. TV 14 (Violence, Sexual Situations) / 7/03 SODAY PRES CITI FOX FIRE LIFE Premieros Tonight 10 PM on 1/16 SOPAY SOPAY Citi Crime Scene Investigation American Investor Track No Show Track No Show Sew LIFE WILL & Grace, Jay Goodnight Grace Springglace Korean Full House Hill & Grace Hill & Grace
text_image TV SCHEDULE SEARCH VIT. CSC: Crime Scene Investigation "Daddy's Little Girl" (Dramal A professional interests tacer a vision to death while working on the bike in a garage attached to a house be shown have women already met. The investigation reveals that the women was about to leave town with the younger of the two women, Director: Terrence O'Hara, TV IV Violence, Sexual Situations! TODAY 10PM 20PM 30PM 40PM 50PM 60PM 70PM 80PM 90PM 100PM 110PM 120PM 130PM 140PM 150PM 160PM 170PM 180PM 190PM 200PM 210PM 220PM 230PM 240PM 250PM 260PM 270PM 280PM 290PM 300PM 310PM 320PM 330PM 340PM 350PM 360PM 370PM 380PM 390PM 400PM 410PM 420PM 430PM 440PM 450PM 460PM 470PM 480PM 490PM 500PM 510PM 520PM 530PM 540PM 550PM 560PM 570PM 580PM 590PM 600PM 610PM 620PM 630PM 640PM 650PM 660PM 670PM 680PM 690PM 700PM 710PM 720PM 730PM 740PM 750PM 760PM 770PM 780PM 790PM 800PM 810PM 820PM 830PM 840PM 850PM 860PM 870PM 880PM 890PM 900PM 910PM 920PM 930PM 940PM 950PM 960PM 970PM 980PM 990PM 1000PM

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Logotipo TV GUIDE - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Logotipo TV GUIDE - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Logotipo TV GUIDE - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Logotipo TV GUIDE - 4

text_image TV 10:02 HOMEBOOK EATING SEARCH SETUP CII: Crime Scene Investigation "Daddy's Little Girl" (Drama) A professional motorcycle lacer is isolated to death while working on his file in a garage attached to a house. It shows with two women's events. The investigation reveals that the victim was about to leave down with the younger of the new women. Director: Terrence O'Hara, 19 (Vale, Sexual Solutions) T. TUESDAY 18:00 S��场联盟 CII: Crime Scene Investigation American Inventory FOX The Big Show FOX The Big Show Sway Will & Grace May Geneligns Grace SpongeBob Kemest Full House
text_image REMINDER CONFLICT! Auto-tuning "Law & Order" will override the recording for "Friends". auto-tune anyway remind, no auto-tune don't set this reminder
text_image SCHEDULE LISTING SEARCH SETUP First shows alphabetically, by categories (Including MDTs) and by keywords A plan appears for updated keyword info Move → then → to choose search type MOVES INCOME CHILDREN All Outdoor Baseball Kating Basketball Sporting Boiling Sailing Swing Soccer Football Tennis Golf Wrapping Hockey Other
text_image Press OK for shows matching category, then move 9+ to highlight show and prep OK to watch if on now or Menu for episode options All Action Animated Comedy Documentary Drama Fantasy Editor Musical Mystery Romance Science Fiction War Western Other All
text_image SCHEDULE INTENS CHANGE TITLE LITERAT MATTERS Wednesday 2000 or TLN That's So Raven "If Only had a job" Raven tiles to make emails to her died for getting him fixed. Raven. TVG iNB MONS CHINESE EDUCATIONAL CHILDREN ALL Double Date 2000 That's So Raven Fri 130am Tuteronail Fri 130am Super Robot Monkey Tech Performance Fri 130am Online Date 2000 Fri 130am ARTS Fri 200am WITCH Fri 200am Finders Impact Fri 200am
text_image SCHEDULE LISTING SYSTEM AVIATIN ARMAGEDON (Action 1996) ★★ A massive animated is on action course with Earth. Director: Michael Bay, PG 13 (Adult Themes, Strong Language, Violence) 15 MOVEL ACTION ARMAGEDON Thundercover Mount Gang Under Stage 2: Dark Territory Live the King Reference On Deadly Ground
text_image Find shows, actions, directions and Descriptions based on a word you enter Press OK to start a new search or move + to choose an existing keyword Sundays B# and The Times News! HOTY KEYWORD ALPHETICAL
text_image Find shows, action, directions and descriptions based on a word you enter from OK to start a new search or move 4 to choose an existing keyword
text_image Find shows, actions, directors and descriptions based on a word you enter Press OK to start a new search or move • to choose an existing keyword
text_image Big Comedy 1980 ★★ A wish wish to be an adult is granted by a mechanical wizard at a carnival. Director, Penny Marshall. TV14 Sexual Situations, Strong Language, Suggestive Dialogue? [3] BIG EIG Big Big Big 12 Showcase Big Black Comedy Show Big Break All Star Challenge Big Break Y All Accs
text_image TV SUNDS ADD SCHEDULE STOCKS SHORT MOVE ▲ to choose a letter for your search still unsolved REVISIONS ADAMSIVE MOVES A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z WSC

10

text_image AMRAGEDON (Action 1985) ★ A massive predator is on a collection course with Earth. Director: Michael Bay, PG 13 (Adult Themes, Strong Language, Violence) [6] MOVUM ACTION AMRAGEDON The City The Thunder Mean Guard Under Stage 2: Dark Territory On the Artist Def Ventrance Def Deadly Ground
text_image shows for Remind are listed here Move + to access To Do and press Mena for options Still Unsolved Blue Shock Short games Home Racing SARID Balance Thu: 5/18 £30pm CL Thu: 5/18 £1.30pm CL Fri: 5/19 £0.30pm CL Fri: 5/19 £0.30pm CL
text_image TV GOLDEN SCHOOL LTD. 1954 BROWN 4:00 8:00 9:00 Home Racing 5:00 Horse Racing Friday 5/19 5:00pm 12 Second Horizon Thursday 5/25 8:00pm 12 Special Center Friday 3:15 10:00pm 12
text_image SCHEDULE LISTERS SEARCH STOP Customize your settings, defaults and channel lineup - and Check listings updates Just move & to highlight your choice, or create Menu to change Video Window status. SETUP Change system settings Change channel display Change default options Display setup progress
text_image Press OK to view or update any info entered during initial Guide setup, or to select a different channel group. SOP Change system settings Change channel display Change default options Display static progress
text_image TV Guide On Screen System Settings You have entered the following TV Guide On Screen system settings. If any setting is marked INCOMPLETE, you will not be able to use that feature until you complete that portion of TV Guide On Screen system setup. 2P Code — 01730 DSA. Cable on "AMTCABLE & IN" Are the above settings correct? Yes, everything is correct Yes, but my channel lineup is incorrect No, repeat setup process
text_image Press OK to set this channel to on off, or auto-hide, or press menu for more options Legal Matters Monday 2:00 am You! CHANNEL EDITOR ON PBS WSB Cable 2 OFF CNE Cable 5 ON WBC Cable 4 ON WCV Cable 5 ON FOX WAT Cable 6 ON FOX WMT-DI Cable 6-1 ON SHOHD Cable 7 ON WCH Cable 8 ON WCK Cable 9
text_image Press OK to verify the status of various Guide setup functions SETUP Change system settings Change channel displays Change default options Display setup progress Sundays Bm on the Home Network

PIONEER PDP5080HD - 10 - 1

text_image The TV Guide On Screen System obtains channel and program information when your unit is turned off - once initial setup is complete, this section will display the time for the next information update. TV Guide On Screen Setup Progress STEP STATUS Search for time Done 5/18 & 8 Stays Search for TV stations with TV Guide data In Progress Search for channel group Done Next Holdings Transmission None scheduled

www.pioneerelectronics.com

Copyright © 2007 Pioneer Corporation.

PDP5080HD Spa.book Page 93 Monday, April 9, 2007 8:05 PM

PIONEER PDP5080HD - www.pioneerelectronics.com - 1

Apéndice

15

Español

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 1

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 2

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 3

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 4

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 5

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 6

PDP5080HD Spa.book Page 94 Monday, April 9, 2007 8:05 PM

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 7

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 8

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 9

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 10

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 11

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 12

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 13

PDP5080HD Spa.book Page 95 Monday, April 9, 2007 8:05 PM

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 14

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 15

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 16

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 17

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 18

PIONEER PDP5080HD - Apéndice - 19

Should this product require service in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Independent Service Company, or if you wish to purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, service manuals, or accessories, please call the number shown below.

$$ 8 0 0 - 4 2 1 - 1 6 2 5 $$

Please do not ship your product to Pioneer without first calling the Customer Support Division at the above listed number for assistance.

Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.

Customer Support Division

P.O. BOX 1760, Long Beach,

For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.

Should this product require service in Canada, please contact a Pioneer Canadian Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Service Company in Canada.

Alternatively, please contact the Customer Satisfaction Department at the following address:

Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.

Customer Satisfaction Department

300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2

1-877-283-5901

905-479-4411

For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.

  1. Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2

1-877-283-5901

905-479-4411

Register Your Product on

http://www.pioneerelectronics.com (US)

http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada)

http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada)

PIONEER CORPORATION

4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.

Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270

K002_B_En

Published by Pioneer Corporation.

Copyright © 2007 Pioneer Corporation.

All rights reserved.

Publication de Pioneer Corporation.

© 2007 Pioneer Corporation.

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : PIONEER

Model : PDP5080HD

Category : TV